PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Copyright © 2021 NR. All rights reserved.
NR, the NR logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of NR Electric Co., Ltd. No NR
trademarks may be used without written permission. NR products appearing in this document may
be covered by P.R. China and foreign patents. NR Electric Co., Ltd. reserves all rights and
benefits afforded under P.R. China and international copyright and patent laws in its products,
including but not limited to software, firmware and documentation. NR Engineering Co., Ltd. is
licensed to use this document as well as all intellectual property rights owned or held by NR
Electric Co., Ltd, including but not limited to copyright, rights in inventions, patents, know-how,
trade secrets, trademarks and trade names, service marks, design rights, database rights and
rights in data, utility models, domain names and all similar rights.
The information in this document is provided for informational use only and does not constitute a
legal contract between NR and any person or entity unless otherwise specified. Information in this
document is subject to change without prior notice.
To the extent required the products described herein meet applicable IEC and IEEE standards,
but no such assurance is given with respect to local codes and ordinances because they vary
greatly.
Although every reasonable effort is made to present current and accurate information, this
document does not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor provide for every
possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Should
further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered
sufficiently for your purposes, please do not hesitate to contact us.
Preface
Preface
About This Manual

The setting guide will give instructions about the setting values of various functions (including the
protection, automation, control, and supervision functions) that is equipped with the device, mainly
in these aspects: brief introduction of the element, calculation principle of the element according to
the setting value related, and partial recommended value based upon domestic usage and
experience. However, the empirical value may not be fully applicable for the power system of other
country, it should be checked according to the practical requirements of local power system. All
settings are only a reference and are not used as final commissioning settings. In addition, the
examples of setting calculation based on the typical application are also provided.
For these calculation results of settings for each function, they are calculated based the
parameters provided by primary equipment manufacturer and system parameters from the field.
All equipment parameters and system parameters needed to be confirmed based on on-site
specific application should be affirmed and checked further.
The guide is not involving of the functions′ configuration and principle, and the detailed description
of relevant contents can be found in the corresponding technical manual and application manual.
Before carrying out any setting work on the device, the user should be familiar with the contents of
this guide, and this guide must be thoroughly read and understood.
Safety Information
This manual is not a complete index of all safety measures required for operation of the equipment
(module or device). However, it comprises important information that must be followed for
personal safety, as well as to avoid material damage. Information is highlighted and illustrated as
follows according to the degree of danger:
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result
in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result
in minor or moderate injury or equipment damage.
Indicates that property damage can result if the measures specified are
not taken.
PCS-931S Line Differential Relay I

Date: 2021-02-02
Preface
Important information about the device, product handling or a certain
section of the documentation which must be given particular attention.
Instructions and Warnings

The following hazard statements apply to this device.
Disconnect or de-energize all external connections BEFORE opening this

device. Contact with hazardous voltages and currents inside this device
can cause electrical shock resulting in injury or death.
Contact with instrument terminals can cause electrical shock that can result
in injury or death.
Use of this equipment in a manner other than specified in this manual can
impair operator safety safeguards provided by this equipment.
Have only qualified personnel service this equipment. If you are not
qualified to service this equipment, you can injure yourself or others, or
cause equipment damage.
This device is shipped with default passwords. Default passwords should

be changed to private passwords at installation. Failure to change each
default password to a private password may allow unauthorized access.
NR shall not be responsible for any damage resulting from unauthorized
access.
DO NOT look into the fiber (laser) ports/connectors.
II PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2021-02-02
0-03-28
Preface
DO NOT look into the end of an optical cable connected to an optical

output.
DO NOT perform any procedures or adjustments that this instruction

manual does not describe.
During installation, maintenance, or testing of the optical ports, ONLY use

the test equipment qualified for Class 1 laser products!
Incorporated components, such as LEDs, transceivers, and laser emitters,

are NOT user serviceable. Return units to NR for repair or replacement.
Equipment components are SENSITIVE to electrostatic discharge (ESD).

Undetectable permanent damage can result if you do not use proper ESD
procedures. Ground yourself, your work surface, and this equipment
BEFORE removing any cover from this equipment. If your facility is not
equipped to work with these components, contact NR about returning this
device and related NR equipment for service.
Insufficiently rated insulation can deteriorate under abnormal operating

conditions and cause equipment damage. For external circuits, use wiring
of SUFFICIENTLY RATED insulation that will not break down under
abnormal operating conditions.
SEVERE power and ground problems can occur on the communications

ports of this equipment as a result of using non-standard cables. Please
use the wiring method recommended in the manual for communication
terminals.
DO NOT connect power to the relay until you have completed these
PCS-931S Line Differential Relay III

Date: 2021-02-02
Preface
procedures and receive instruction to apply power. Equipment damage can

result otherwise.
Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than

those specified herein, may RESULT IN hazardous radiation exposure.
The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify

existing features, please MAKE SURE that the version of this manual is
compatible with the product in your hand.
Document Conventions
⚫ Menu path is connected with the arrow "→" and bold.
For example: the access path of protection settings is: MainMenu→Settings→Protection

Settings
⚫ Settings not in the table should be placed in brackets.
For example: the system setting [Opt_SysFreq]
⚫ Cross-references are presented in italics.
For example: refer to Figure 1.1-1, refer to Table 1.1-1, reference to Section 1.1
⚫ Binary input signals, binary output signals, analogues, LED lights, buttons, and other fixed
meanings, should be written in double quotes and bold.
For example: press the button "ENT".
Symbols
⚫ AND Gate
& & &
⚫ OR Gate
>=1 >=1 >=1
⚫ Comparator
IV PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2021-02-02
0-03-28
Preface
⚫ Binary signal Input
BI xxx
⚫ Signal input
SIG xxx
⚫ Setting input
SET xxx
⚫ Enable input
EN xxx
⚫ Timer
Optional definite-time or inverse-time characteristics
Timer
t
t
⚫ Timer
Fixed delay pickup (10ms), fixed delay dropout (2ms)
10ms 2ms
⚫ Timer
Settable delay pickup, fixed delay dropout
[Tset1] 0ms
⚫ Timer
Fixed delay pickup, settable delay dropout
0ms [Tset2]
⚫ Timer
PCS-931S Line Differential Relay V

Date: 2021-02-02
Preface
Settable delay pickup, settable delay dropout
[Tset1] [Tset2]
⚫ Generator
⚫ Transformer
⚫ Reactor
⚫ Motor
⚫ Capacitor
⚫ Busbar
⚫ Circuit breaker
52
⚫ Current transformer
VI PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2021-02-02
0-03-28
Preface
3CT
*
⚫ Voltage transformer
3VT
⚫ Disconnector
⚫ Earth
Phase Label Corresponding Relationship

Basic
A, B, C L1, L2, L3 R, Y, B
AN, BN, CN L1N, L2N, L3N RN,YN, BN
ABC L123 RYB
U (voltage) V U
Example
Ia, Ib, Ic, I0 IL1, IL2, IL3, IN IR, IY, IB, IN
Ua, Ub, Uc VL1, VL2, VL3 UR, UY, UB
Uab, Ubc, Uca VL12, VL23, VL31 URY, UYB, UBR
U0, U1, U2 VN, V1, V2 UN, U1, U2
Warranty
This product is covered by the standard NR 10-year warranty. For warranty details, please consult
the manufacturer or agent for warranty information.
Document Structure
This manual provides detailed instructions for setting the PCS-931S, which covers all functions,
such as protection, control, supervision, measurement, etc., and general device setup. Read the
sections that pertain to your application to gain valuable information about using the PCS-931S.
To concentrate on the target sections of this manual as your job needs and responsibilities dictate.
PCS-931S Line Differential Relay VII

Date: 2021-02-02
Preface
An overview of each manual section and section topics follows.
1 Introduction
Introduces summarizes functions and full view about the settings in the device.
2 Global Settings
Describs the access path, settings list (name, range, unit and step) of global settings, including
system setting, device setting, communication setting, disturbance fault recording setting, label
setting and clock synchronization setting supervision setting, and some important setting
principles are also provided.
3 Protection Settings
Describes the access path, settings list (name, range, unit and step) of protection settings. The
detailed setting calculation guidelines and the recommended value of some settings are also
provided. Some application examples are provided to help familiarize and understand the
calculation process, and to assist you with your own protection settings calculations.
4 Control Settings
Describes the access path, settings list (name, range, unit and step) of control settings. The
provided.
5 Measurement Settings
Describes the access path, settings list (name, range, unit and step) of measurement settings. The
provided.
6 Synchrophasor Measurement Settings

Describes the access path, settings list (name, range, unit and step) of synchrophasor
measurement settings. The detailed setting calculation guidelines and the recommended value of
some settings are also provided.
7 Travelling-Wave Fault Location Settings

Describes the access path, settings list (name, range, unit and step) of travelling-wave fault
location settings. The detailed setting calculation guidelines and the recommended value of some
settings are also provided.
8 Supervision Settings
Describes the access path, settings list (name, range, unit and step) of supervision settings. The
provided.
9 Logic Links
Describes the access path, settings list (name, range, unit and step) of logic links. The detailed
VIII PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2021-02-02
0-03-28
Preface
setting calculation guidelines and the recommended value of some settings are also provided.
Document Revision History

PN: ZL_PCS-931S_X_Setting Guide_EN_Overseas General_X
Current version: R1.00
Corresponding Version
Release Date Description of change
Document Software
R1.00 R1.41 2021-02-02 ⚫ Form the original manual
PCS-931S Line Differential Relay IX

Date: 2021-02-02
Preface
X PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2021-02-02
0-03-28
1 Introduction
1 Introduction
1
Table of Contents
1.1 Overview........................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2 Functions ......................................................................................................... 1-2
1.3 Settings Full-View .......................................................................................... 1-10
List of Figures
Figure 1.1-1 Typical application of single circuit breaker (single busbar) ............................ 1-1
Figure 1.1-2 Typical application of single circuit breaker (double busbars) ........................ 1-1
Figure 1.1-3 Typical application of double circuit breakers ................................................... 1-2
Figure 1.2-1 Functional overview of PCS-931S ........................................................................ 1-3
Figure 1.3-1 Full view of PCS-931S settings .......................................................................... 1-11
PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 1-a

Date: 2021-02-02
1 Introduction
1-b PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2021-02-02
1 Introduction
1.1 Overview
PCS-931S protect overhead and underground lines, feeders, and cables on all voltage levels with
1
highest possible selectivity. The availability of various protection and automation functions permits
its utilization in all domains of line protection. The devices contain all important auxiliary functions
that are necessary today for safe network operation. This includes control, measurement and
monitoring functions. The large number of communication interfaces and communication protocols
satisfies the requirements of communication-based selective protection and automation operation.
Its modular structure permits line protection devices always to be adapted flexibly to the individual
requirements.
3CT 3CT
52 * * 52
3VT 3VT
CH1 CH1
PCS-931S Optical fibre channel PCS-931S
CH2 CH2
1VT 1VT
Communication channel via direct dedicated fibre or MUX
Figure 1.1-1 Typical application of single circuit breaker (single busbar)
3CT 3CT
52
* * 52
1VT 1VT
CH1 CH1
CH2 CH2
3VT 3VT
Communication channel via direct dedicated fibre or MUX

3VT 3VT
Figure 1.1-2 Typical application of single circuit breaker (double busbars)
PCS-931S is a high-speed transmission line differential relay featuring single-pole & three-pole
tripping and reclosing with synchronism check. The device features extensive metering & data
recording including high-resolution data capture and reporting. PCS-931S features expanded
control equation programming for easy and flexible implementation of custom protection and
control schemes.
A simple and robust hardware design features efficient digital signal processing. Combined with
extensive self-testing, these features provide device reliability and enhance relay availability.
PCS-931S can be configured to support single circuit breaker application or double circuit
breakers application by PCS-Studio. If the device is applied to double circuit breakers mode, all
protection functions related to the number of circuit breaker will be affected.
PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 1-1

Date: 2021-02-02
1 Introduction
52 52
1VT 1VT
1 3CT 3CT
*
*
3VT 3VT
CH1 CH1
52 52
CH2 CH2
3CT 3CT
*
*
1VT Communication channel via direct dedicated fibre or MUX 1VT
1VT 1VT
52 52
Figure 1.1-3 Typical application of double circuit breakers
The PCS-931S is widely adopted not only for conventional substations, but also for digital
substations. It supports IEC 61850 Editions 1 and 2 and provides GOOSE and SV network
interfaces with high real-time performance. The process level network supports peer-to-peer (P2P)
mode and networking mode, including single network mode and dual network mode. The station
level network could also receive and send MMS messages (such as interlocking signals) or
process level GOOSE messages (such as circuit breakers or disconnectors positions and trip
signals).
1.2 Functions
The functional overview of the device is shown in Figure 1.2-1.
1-2 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2021-02-02
-12-28
1 Introduction
Busbar
3VT
52 1
85 21 67P 67G 67Q 32R 49P 50DZ 46BC 62P D 50BF 37 PMU 59P
3CT
*
87L 21D 50/51P 50/51G 50/51Q FR 59Q
78 FL
Data transmit/Rec eiv e

SOTF 59G
81O 27P
81U 81R
87STB (Only for one and a half breakers arrangement)

1VT
25 79
Line
Figure 1.2-1 Functional overview of PCS-931S
1 Protection
ANSI Protection functions Remark
⚫ DPFC current differential element (2 stages)
⚫ Steady-state current differential element (2 stages)
87 Current differential protection ⚫ Neutral current differential element (1 stage)
⚫ CT saturation detection
⚫ Capacitive current compensation
⚫ Independent pilot zone (forward direction and reverse
direction, mho or quadrilateral characteristics)
⚫ PUTT, POTT, Blocking, Unblocking, Zone Extension

Pilot distance protection
⚫ Current reversal logic
85
⚫ Weak infeed echo or echo&trip
⚫ Open breaker echo
Pilot directional earth-fault ⚫ Directional zero-sequence comparison element for pilot
protection scheme

Date: 2021-02-02
1 Introduction
⚫ PTT, Blocking and Unblocking
⚫ Current reversal logic

1 ⚫ Open breaker echo
⚫ Up to 6 zones
⚫ 3 independent phase-to-ground distance elements for each
zone
⚫ 3 independent phase-to-phase distance elements for each
zone
⚫ Selectable quadrilateral characteristics or mho characteristics
⚫ Independent impedance settings and time delays for each
21L Distance protection zone
⚫ Zero-sequence current compensation for phase-to-ground
distance element
⚫ Selectable forward direction, reverse direction or
non-direction (except zone 1 that is fixed as forward direction)
⚫ Load encroachment for each zone
⚫ Power swing blocking and releasing for each zone
⚫ Faulty phase selection for each zone
⚫ Fixed forward direction
21D DPFC distance protection ⚫ High-speed operation
⚫ Supplementary for zone 1 of distance protection
78 Out-of-step protection ⚫ Easy to set and independent of system parameters
⚫ Up to 6 stages with independent logic
⚫ Voltage control element for each stage
⚫ Optional direction element for each stage, including forward

67P
Phase overcurrent protection direction, reverse direction or non-direction
50/51P
⚫ Optional definite-time characteristics and inverse-time
characteristics for each stage
⚫ Trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage

Date: 2021-02-02
-12-28
1 Introduction
⚫ Harmonic control element for each stage

1
direction, reverse direction or non-direction

67G
Earth fault protection ⚫ Optional definite-time characteristics and inverse-time
50/51G
⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage
⚫ Harmonic control element for each stage

67Q Negative-sequence
direction, reverse direction or non-direction
50/51Q overcurrent protection
⚫ Via distance measurement elements
SOTF Switch onto fault ⚫ Via dedicated earth fault element
⚫ Via phase overcurrent element

49P Thermal overload protection

59P Phase overvoltage protection
⚫ Optional phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltage
⚫ Optional “1-out-of-3” logic or “3-out-of-3” logic
27P Phase undervoltage protection characteristics for each stage
⚫ Optional phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltage
⚫ Optional “1-out-of-3” logic or “3-out-of-3” logic

Date: 2021-02-02
1 Introduction
⚫ Blocked by instantaneous VT circuit failure

1 ⚫ Optional auxiliary criterion, including CB position check and
current check
Negative-sequence ⚫ Up to 2 stages with independent logic

59Q
overvoltage protection ⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage
Residual overvoltage ⚫ Up to 2 stages with independent logic

59G
protection ⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage

81O Overfrequency protection
⚫ Voltage control element

81U Underfrequency protection
⚫ Voltage control element
Frequency rate-of-change ⚫ Up to 4 stages with independent logic

81R
protection ⚫ Voltage control element

32R Reverse power protection
⚫ Optional auxiliary criterion, including CB position check and
37 Undercurrent protection current check
⚫ Phase-segregated re-trip and three-phases re-trip
⚫ Optional current criterion (phase overcurrent element,
zero-sequence overcurrent element, negative-sequence

50BF Breaker failure protection
overcurrent element)
⚫ Optional circuit breaker position check
⚫ Two time delays
⚫ Protect the T-zone in one-and-a-half breaker and ring breaker

87STB Stub differential protection
arrangements
50DZ Dead zone protection ⚫ Clear the dead zone faults between CT and the circuit breaker
46BC Broken conductor protection ⚫ Adopt the ratio of negative-sequence current to

Date: 2021-02-02
-12-28
1 Introduction
positive-sequence current (Ι2/Ι1) to detect the broken
conductor.
1
⚫ Initiated by three auxiliary contacts of phase-segregate circuit
breaker
62PD Pole discrepancy protection
⚫ Optional auxiliary criterion (zero-sequence current element or
negative-sequence current element)
25 Synchronism check ⚫ Independent logic for auto-reclosing and manually closing
⚫ One shot or multi-shot
⚫ 1-pole AR, 3-pole AR or 1/3-pole AR
79 Auto-reclosing ⚫ Optional trigger mode, including protection operating and
external binary input
⚫ Support synchro-check and voltage check
⚫ Compatible with IEEE C37.118-2005, IEEE C37.118.1-2011,

PMU Phasor measurement unit
IEEE C37.118.2-2011 and IEEE C37.118.1a-2014.
⚫ Single-ended impedance-based method
FL Fault location ⚫ Zero-sequence mutual coupling compensation for parallel
lines
⚫ Single-ended travelling-wave-based method

TWFL Travelling-Wave fault location
⚫ Double-ended travelling-wave-based method
DPFC is the abbreviation of deviation of power frequency component.
2 Control
⚫ Circuit breaker & disconnector control (Remote/local)
⚫ Synchronism check for auto-reclosing and manual closing
⚫ Voltage selection
3 Synchrophasor measurement
⚫ Synchronize with the GPS time by IRIG-B time source
⚫ Calculate synchronized phasors, including: Ua, Ub, Uc, U1, U2, U0, Ia, Ib, Ic, I1, I2, I0
⚫ Calculate analog values, including: active power (P), reactive power (Q), frequency,

Date: 2021-02-02
1 Introduction
ROCOF (df/dt)
⚫ Transmit binary status of the IED to PDC (Phasor Data Concentrator) according to IEEE
1 C37.118 standard
⚫ Realize high accurate measurement of the phasors and analogs according to the IEEE
C37.118.1-2011 and IEEE C37.118.1a-2014 standard.
⚫ Communicate with PDC according to IEEE C37.118-2005 and IEEE C37.118.2-2011
⚫ Supporting P Class or M Class measurement (user selectable)
⚫ Measurement of up to 32 binary status (user configurable)
⚫ Output of synchrophasor with timestamp, support of multiple protocols (TCP, TCP-UDP,

UDP) and multiple data rates (2f0, f0, f0/2) for maximum 4 clients (PDC)
4 Measurement
⚫ Current and voltage measurement at a 2.4KHz sampling rate
⚫ Current and voltage measurement at a 9.6KHz sampling rate
⚫ Travelling wave current measurement at a 1MHz sampling rate
⚫ Energy metering (active and reactive energy are calculated in import respectively export
direction)
⚫ Power (Apparent/Real/Reactive)
⚫ Power factor
⚫ Frequency
5 Recording
⚫ Event Recorder including 1024 disturbance records, 1024 binary events, 1024 supervision
events, 256 control logs and 1024 device logs.
⚫ 64 disturbance waveforms records (The file format of disturbance recorder is compatible

with international COMTRADE file.)
⚫ 64 travelling wave fault location (TWFL) records (The file format of disturbance recorder is
compatible with international COMTRADE file.)
⚫ 64 high-frequency waveforms records (The file format of disturbance recorder is

compatible with international COMTRADE file.)
6 Supervision
⚫ VT circuit supervision
⚫ CT circuit supervision
⚫ Trip/Close coil supervision

Date: 2021-02-02
-12-28
1 Introduction
⚫ Self diagnostic
⚫ Pilot communication channel supervision
⚫ DC power supply supervision

1
⚫ Channel status statistic
⚫ System frequency supervision
7 Pilot channel scheme
⚫ Optional single- or dual- pilot channels (fiber optic)
⚫ Support G.703 and C37.94
8 Communication interface
⚫ 2 or 4 100Base-TX copper Ethernet ports for SCADA communication
⚫ 2 or 4 100Base-FX optical Ethernet ports for SCADA communication
⚫ 2 RS-485 serial ports for SCADA communication
⚫ 1 RS-485 serial port for clock synchronization
⚫ 1 TTL serial port for clock synchronization
⚫ 1 BNC port for clock synchronization
⚫ 1 front RJ-45 port for debugging
⚫ 1 rear RJ-45 port for debugging
9 Communication protocol
⚫ IEC 61850 Editions 1 and 2
⚫ IEC 60870-5-103
⚫ DNP3.0
⚫ Modbus
⚫ IEC 62439 Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)
⚫ IEC 62439 High-availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR)
⚫ IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)
10 Digital application
⚫ IEC 61850 MMS Server
⚫ IEC 61850-8-1 GOOSE
⚫ IEC 61850-9-2LE SV
⚫ 4 100Base-TX electrical or 100Base-FX optical Ethernet port (station level)

Date: 2021-02-02
1 Introduction
⚫ Extendable 100Base-FX optical Ethernet port (process level)
11 Clock synchronization
1 ⚫ IRIG-B: IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level, TTL level or BNC
⚫ PPS: Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level, binary input or BNC
⚫ IEEE 1588: Clock message based on IEEE 1588 via Ethernet network
⚫ SNTP: Unicast (point-to-point) & broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network
⚫ Clock messages: IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, Modbus protocol and DNP3.0 protocol
12 Cyber security
⚫ NERC CIP
⚫ IEC 62351
⚫ IEC 62443
⚫ IEEE 1686
13 User interface
⚫ Friendly HMI interface with LCD, easy-to-use keypad aids simple navigation and
set-point adjustment
⚫ Push buttons for open/close, switch for selection between local and remote control, and
user's login and logout authority management
⚫ 4 Programmable operator push-buttons with user-configurable labels
⚫ Up to 18 programmable target LEDs with user-configurable labels
⚫ 1 RS-232 rear ports for printer
⚫ Language switchover—English + selected language
⚫ Configuration tool—PCS-Studio
14 Miscellaneous
⚫ User programmable logic
⚫ Fault phase selection
⚫ Switching system phase sequences function (ABC or ACB)
1.3 Settings Full-View
The full view about the device's settings is summarized as

Date: 2021-02-02
-12-28
1 Introduction
Settings
Global Settings Shared settings for all setting groups

1
System Settings
Device Settings
Communication Settings
General Comm Settings
IEC61850 Settings
IEC103 Settings
DNP Settings
Modbus Settings
DFR Settings
Label Settings
ClockSyn Settings
Superv Settings
Prot Settings Independent settings for each setting group
FD Settings
Line Settings
Meas Control Settings
Function Settings
Syn Settings
Control Settings
Interlocking Settings
Energy Metering Settings
TWFL Settings
PMU Settings
Logic Links
Function Links
GOOSE Send Links
GOOSE Recv Links
SV Recv Links
Figure 1.3-1 Full view of PCS-931S settings

Date: 2021-02-02
1 Introduction

Date: 2021-02-02
-12-28
2 Global Settings
2 Global Settings
Table of Contents
2.1 System Settings ............................................................................................... 2-1 2

2.1.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Settings List .......................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.3 Calculation Principle ............................................................................................................. 2-2
2.2 Device Setting .................................................................................................. 2-5

2.2.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 2-5
2.3 Communication Settings ................................................................................ 2-9

2.3.1 General Communication Settings ........................................................................................ 2-9
2.3.2 IEC61850 Communication Settings ................................................................................... 2-15
2.3.3 IEC103 Communication Settings ....................................................................................... 2-18
2.3.4 DNP Communication Settings ............................................................................................ 2-21
2.3.5 Modbus Communication Settings ...................................................................................... 2-33
2.3.6 SV Communication Settings .............................................................................................. 2-34
2.4 Disturbance Fault Recording Settings ......................................................... 2-35

2.4.1 Access Path ........................................................................................................................ 2-35
2.4.2 Setting List .......................................................................................................................... 2-35
2.4.3 Calculation Principle ........................................................................................................... 2-35
2.5 Label Settings ................................................................................................ 2-37

2.5.1 Access Path ........................................................................................................................ 2-37
2.5.2 Setting List .......................................................................................................................... 2-37
2.6 Clock Synchronization Settings ................................................................... 2-38

2.6.1 Access Path ........................................................................................................................ 2-38
2.6.2 Setting List .......................................................................................................................... 2-38

Date: 2021-02-02
2 Global Settings
List of Tables
Table 2.1-1 System settings ....................................................................................................... 2-1
Table 2.2-1 Device settings......................................................................................................... 2-5

2 Table 2.3-1 General communication settings ........................................................................... 2-9
Table 2.3-2 IEC61850 communicaiton settings ...................................................................... 2-15
Table 2.3-3 IEC103 communication settings .......................................................................... 2-19
Table 2.3-4 DNP communication settings ............................................................................... 2-22
Table 2.3-5 Modbus communication settings ........................................................................ 2-33
Table 2.3-6 SV communication settings.................................................................................. 2-34
Table 2.4-1 Disturbance fault recording settings ................................................................... 2-35
Table 2.5-1 Label settings ......................................................................................................... 2-37
Table 2.6-1 Clock synchronization settings ........................................................................... 2-38

Date: 2021-02-02
Date: 2020-12-28
2 Global Settings
2.1 System Settings
2.1.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsSystem Settings 2

⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalGlobal SettingsSystem Settings
2.1.2 Settings List

Table 2.1-1 System settings
Name Range Step Unit
Active_Grp 1~20 1
PrimaryEquip_Name Max 20 characters
Opt_SysFreq 50, 60 Hz
ABC
Opt_PhSeq
ACB
Prot.U1n 0.00~1100.00 0.01 kV
Prot.U2n 1.00~200.00 0.01 V
Prot.CB1.I1n 0~60000 1 A
Prot.CB1.I2n 1 or 5 A
Prot.CB2.I1n 0~60000 1 A
Prot.CB2.I2n 1 or 5 A
UB1.Syn.U1n 0.00~1100.00 0.01 kV
UB1.Syn.U2n 1.00~200.00 0.01 V
UL2.Syn.U1n 0.00~1100.00 0.01 kV
UL2.Syn.U2n 1.00~200.00 0.01 V
UB2.Syn.U1n 0.00~1100.00 0.01 kV
UB2.Syn.U2n 1.00~200.00 0.01 V
3I0Adj.I1n 0~9999 1 A
3I0Adj.I2n 1 or 5 A

Date: 2021-02-02
2 Global Settings
Disabled
Prot.CB1.En_RevCT
Enabled
Disabled
Prot.CB2.En_RevCT
2 Enabled
Disabled
3I0Adj.En_RevCT
Enabled
Disabled
Prot.En_VT
Enabled
NoVoltSel
DblBusOneCB
CB1.VoltSel.Opt_CBConfig
3/2BusCB
3/2TieCB
NoVoltSel
DblBusOneCB
CB2.VoltSel.Opt_CBConfig
3/2BusCB
3/2TieCB
2.1.3 Calculation Principle
1. Active_Grp
It is used to set the number of active setting group, and several setting groups (20 at most) can be
configured for protection settings and measurement & control settings, but only one is active at a
time.
The settings in different group can be changed to suit the needs of actual application. The default
settings have been chosen according to established practice but will usually require adjustment to
suit the requirements of individual applications.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
2. PrimaryEquip_Name
It is used to set the name of the protected primary equipment, such as busbar, transformer, line,
capacitor, etc. It will be displayed in the printed result and the DFR (Disturbance Fault Recording)
file.
This setting is case sensitive, and its maximum permissible length of this setting is 20 characters.

Date: 2021-02-02
Date: 2020-12-28
2 Global Settings
All the allowed characters in this setting are listed as below:
A a B b C c D d E e F f
G g H h I i J j K k L l
M m N n O o P p Q q R r
S s T t U u V v W w X x 2
Y y Z z _ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9
3. Opt_SysFreq
It is used to set the system frequency. It can be set to either 50Hz or 60 Hz according to the
system frequency.
4. Opt_PhSeq
It is used to inform the device of the actual system phase sequence, either "ABC" or "ACB". CT
and VT inputs on the device, labeled as A, B and C, must be connected to system phase A, B and
C for correct operation. This will affect positive/negative-sequence quantities calculated by the
device and will also affect functions that are dependent on phase quantities.
5. Prot.U1n
It is used to set primary rated voltage of VT (protection voltage), and it should be set based on
phase-to-phase value.
6. Prot.U2n
It is used to set secondary rated voltage of VT (protection voltage), and it should be set based on
phase-to-phase value.
7. Prot.CB*.I1n
It is used to set primary rated value of CT corresponding to circuit breaker * (protection current,
*=1 or 2).
8. Prot.CB*.I2n
It is used to set secondary rated value of CT corresponding to circuit breaker 1 (protection current,
*=1 or 2).
9. UB1.Syn.U1n
It is used to set primary rated voltage of busbar No.1 VT (synchronism voltage), and it should be

Date: 2021-02-02
2 Global Settings
set based on phase-to-phase value.
10. UB1.Syn.U2n
It is used to set secondary rated voltage of busbar No.1 VT (synchronism voltage), and it should
be set based on phase-to-phase value.
11. UL2.Syn.U1n
2 It is used to set primary rated voltage of line No.2 VT (synchronism voltage), and it should be set
based on phase-to-phase value.
12. UL2.Syn.U2n
It is used to set secondary rated voltage of line No.2 VT (synchronism voltage), and it should be
13. UB2.Syn.U1n
It is used to set primary rated voltage of busbar No.2 VT (synchronism voltage), and it should be
14. UB2.Syn.U2n
It is used to set secondary rated voltage of busbar No.2 VT (synchronism voltage), and it should
be set based on phase-to-phase value.
15. 3I0Adj.I1n
It is used to set primary rated value of CT. (residual current for mutual coupling compensation)
16. 3I0Adj.I2n
It is used to set secondary rated value of CT. (residual current for mutual coupling compensation)
17. Prot.CB*.En_RevCT
It is used to adjust the current polarity of CT corresponding to circuit breaker *. (*=1 or 2)
Disabled: keep connected current polarity unchanged
Enabled: make connected current polarity reversed
18. 3I0Adj.En_RevCT
It is used to adjust residual current polarity from parallel line.
Disabled: keep connected current polarity unchanged
Enabled: make connected current polarity reversed
19. Prot.En_VT
It is used to enable/disable VT connect to the device, which is used for protection calculation.

Date: 2021-02-02
Date: 2020-12-28
2 Global Settings
20. CB*.VoltSel.Opt_CBConfig
It is used to select the configuration mode of circuit breaker *, and it should be set as "NoVoltSel" if
no voltage selection is adopted. (*=1 or 2)
NoVoltSel: no voltage selection
DblBusOneCB: one circuit breaker for double busbar
3/2BusCB: bus side circuit breaker for one and a half breakers
2
3/2TieCB: line side circuit breaker for one and a half breakers
2.2 Device Setting
2.2.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsDevice Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalGlobal SettingsDevice Settings
2.2.2 Setting List

Table 2.2-1 Device settings
Disabled
En_DebugPort
Enabled
Disabled
En_TelnetPort
Enabled
Disabled
En_VirtualLCDPort
Enabled
Ctrl_Password 000~999 1
Disabled
En_NoCtrlPwd
Enabled
Disabled
En_PopupRecord_Blkd
Enabled
Un_BinaryInput 24~250 1 V

Date: 2021-02-02
2 Global Settings
DC
Opt_Pwr_BI AC50Hz
AC60Hz
2 U_Pickup_BI 50.0%Un~80.0%Un 0.1 %
U_Dropoff_BI 50.0%Un~80.0%Un 0.1 %
Mon_Window_Jitter 0.000~500.000 0.001 s
Num_Blk_Jitter 2~500000 1
Blk_Window_Jitter 0.000~500.000 0.001 s
Num_Reblk_Jitter 1~500000 1
Disabled
En_Jitter_Blk
Enabled
Disabled
En_BICheckInstP
Enabled
1. En_DebugPort
It is used to enable/disable the debugging port of this device, which is used for debugging tool
connection, program download, variable debugging, etc. via PCS-Studio configuration tool.
If all the unnecessary ports (including the debugging port) are required to be disabled to ensure
cyber security, please configure this setting as "Disabled".
2. En_TelnetPort
It is used to enable/disable the Telnet port of this device.
If the Telnet port needs to be used, please configure this setting as “Enabled”.
If all the unnecessary ports (including the Telnet port) are required to be disabled to ensure cyber
security, please configure this setting as "Disabled"'.
3. En_VirtualLCDPort
It is used to enable/disable the virtual LCD port of this device.
The virtual LCD port is used to simulate a virtual HMI to acquire device information via PCS-Studio
configuration tool. If all the unnecessary ports (including the virtual LCD port) are required to be
disabled to ensure cyber security, please configure this setting as "Disabled".

Date: 2021-02-02
Date: 2020-12-28
2 Global Settings
4. Ctrl_Password
It is used to set the password when executing the control operation via the device's LCD.
Only digits from "000" to "999" can be accepted. If the setting [En_NoCtrlPwd] is configured as
"Enabled", this setting will be invalid even if it is configured.
5. En_NoCtrlPwd
It is used to determine whether it is necessary to input the password when executing the control
2
operation via the device's LCD.
Disabled: it is necessary to input the password when executing the control operation via the
device's LCD.
Enabled: the control operation to switchgear (CB or DS) via the device's LCD can be directly
executed without the password verification.
6. En_PopupRecord_Blkd
It is used to enable/disable the blocking function to automatic pop up of event records.
If all the event records (including disturbance records, supervision events, IO events, control
events, etc.) are forbidden to pop up in the main graph of local LCD automatically, i.e.: they can
only be viewed by entering corresponding menus, please configure this setting as "Enabled".
7. Un_BinaryInput
It is used to set voltage level of binary input module.
It must be the same as the voltage level of the binary inputs which are connected to this device.
8. Opt_Pwr_BI
It is used to select power supply mode of binary input module.
Three options are available: DC, AC50Hz and AC60Hz. It must be the same as the power supply
mode of the binary inputs which are connected to this device.
9. U_Pickup_BI
It is used to set pickup voltage of binary input module.
This setting is expressed as a percentage value. It must be smaller than the minimum normal
binary input voltage of the binary inputs connected to this device. Base on engineering experience,
it is recommended to be configured as "63.0%".
10. U_Dropoff_BI
It is used to set dropoff voltage of binary input module.
This setting is expressed as a percentage value. It must be smaller than the value of the setting
[U_Pickup_BI] in this device. Base on engineering experience, it is recommended to be configured
as "55.0%".

Date: 2021-02-02
2 Global Settings
11. Mon_Window_Jitter
It is used to set the monitoring window of binary input jitter processing.
In the time span defined by this setting, the state changes of binary input will be recorded. If the
binary input jitter processing is required, this setting must be configured as a value greater than 0.
When the setting [En_Jitter_Blk] is set as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be
2 configured.
12. Num_Blk_Jitter
It is used to set the times threshold to block the state changes of binary input due to jitter.
If the binary input jitter processing is required, this setting must be configured as a value greater
than 0. If the setting [Mon_Window_Jitter] is modified to a bigger value, the setting
[Num_Blk_Jitter] is recommended to be modified to a bigger value, too. When the setting
[En_Jitter_Blk] is set as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be configured.
13. Blk_Window_Jitter
It is blocking window of the state changes of binary input due to jitter.
In the time span defined by this setting, the state changes of binary inpu will be recorded. If the
binary input jitter processing is required, this setting must be configured as a value greater than 0.
When the setting [En_Jitter_Blk] is set as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
14. Num_Reblk_Jitter
It is times threshold to initiate immediately another blocking window of the state changes of binary
input due to continuous jitter.
If the binary input jitter processing is required, this setting must be configured as a value greater
than 0. If the setting [Blk_Window_Jitter] is modified to a bigger value, the setting
[Num_Reblk_Jitter] is recommended to be modified to a bigger value, too. When the setting
[En_Jitter_Blk] is set as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be configured.
15. En_Jitter_Blk
It is used to enable/disable the jitter processing function in case of binary input voltage variation.
If binary input jitter processing is required, please configure this setting as "Enabled".
16. En_BICheckInstP
It is designed to enable/disable the high-power conducting mode of binary inputs
If the binary input the rated voltage of binary input is 110Vdc or above is applied to acquire the
mechanical signal, for example, the binary signal from winding temperature relay, oil temperature
relay or Buchholz relay. The conducting mode of each binary input is switched into the high-power
mode to improve the anti-interference ability when the setting [En_BICheckInstP] is set as
"Enabled". The binary input will not be considered as being energized unless the instantaneous
active power rises to a certain value and during time is larger than 20ms, so as to avoid mistaken

Date: 2021-02-02
Date: 2020-12-28
2 Global Settings
signal.
This conducting mode is only available in the device equipped with some certain BI plug-in
modules (NR6604A or NR6611A) and the rated voltage of binary input is 110Vdc or above.
Otherwise, this conducting mode will be unavailable and this setting will be hidden.
When the setting [En_BICheckInstP] is set as "Enabled", and the debouncing time should be
larger than the during time (20ms) of the instantaneous active power.
2
2.3 Communication Settings
2.3.1 General Communication Settings

2.3.1.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsComm SettingsGeneral Comm Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalComm SettingsGeneral Comm Settings
2.3.1.2 Setting List
Table 2.3-1 General communication settings
IP_LAN1 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
Mask_LAN1 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
Disabled
En_LAN1
Enabled
IP_LAN2 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
Mask_LAN2 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
Disabled
En_LAN2
Enabled
IP_LAN3 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
Mask_LAN3 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
Disabled
En_LAN3
Enabled
IP_LAN4 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

Date: 2021-02-02
2 Global Settings
Mask_LAN4 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
Disabled
En_LAN4
Enabled
2 Gateway 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
4800
9600
19200
Baud_Printer bps
38400
57600
115200
Disabled
En_AutoPrint
Enabled
IEC103
Protocol_RS485-1
Modbus
IEC103
Protocol_RS485-2
Modbus
4800
9600
19200
Baud_RS485-1 bps
38400
57600
115200
4800
9600
19200
Baud_RS485-2 bps
38400
57600
115200

Date: 2021-02-02
Date: 2020-12-28
2 Global Settings
Addr_RS485-1 1~254 1
Addr_RS485-2 1~254 1
Cfg_NetPorts_Bond 0~255
Normal 2
1-2:Normal, 3-4:HSR
B01.Opt_NetMode 1-2:Normal, 3-4:PRP
1-2:Normal, 3-4:RSTP
1-2:PRP, 3-4:PRP
IP_SyslogServer01 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
IP_SyslogServer02 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
IP_SyslogServer03 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
IP_SyslogServer04 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
Disabled
En_IP_Whitelist
Enabled
IP**_Whitelist 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
2.3.1.3 Calculation Principle
1. IP_LAN*
It is used to set IP address of Ethernet port * in the CPU plug-in module (*=1, 2, 3, 4).
This setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4. If the setting [En_LAN*] is configured as
"Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be configured. Please configure this setting
according to actual requirements.
2. Mask_LAN*
It is used to set subnet mask of Ethernet port * in the CPU plug-in module (*=1, 2, 3, 4).
This setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4. If the setting [En_LAN*] is configured as
"Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be configured. Please configure this setting
according to actual requirements.
3. En_LAN*
It is used to enable/disable Ethernet port * in the CPU plug-in module (*=1, 2, 3, 4).

Date: 2021-02-02
2 Global Settings
4. Gateway
It is used to set IP address of the gateway (router).
If there is no gateway, please configure this setting as "0.0.0.0". This setting adopts dotted-decimal
notation of IPv4.
5. Baud_Printer
2 It is used to set the baud rate of printer port.
It must be the same as the baud rate of the printer that is connected to this device.
6. En_AutoPrint
It is used to enable/disable automatic printing function.
When the setting is set as "Enabled", they will be printed automatically when the event records
(such as, disturbance records, supervision events, IO events, etc.) are generated.
7. Protocol_RS485-1, Protocol_RS485-2
It is used to set communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port 1 (2) c.
Two options are available:
IEC103: IEC60870-5-103 protocol
Modbus: Modbus protocol
It must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client (for example, local
SCADA system, etc.).
8. Baud_RS485-1, Baud_RS485-2
It is used to set baud rate of rear RS-485 serial port 1 (2) in the CPU plug-in module.
9. Addr_RS485-1, Addr_RS485-2
It is used to set communication address of rear RS-485 serial port 1 (2) in the CPU plug-in module.
10. Cfg_NetPorts_Bond
It is used to set the Ethernet ports that are used as hot standby each other.
The setting is used to configure dual-networks switching, and it means that no dual-networks
switching is created when the setting is set as "0". The device supports a bond between any two
Ethernet ports, and the bond among three or above Ethernet ports is impermissible.
The devices communicate with SAS by station level network. In order to ensure reliable

Date: 2021-02-02
Date: 2020-12-28
2 Global Settings
communication, dual networks (i.e., network 1 and network 2) are adopted. Another special
communication mode based on dual networks is that Ethernet port 1 and Ethernet port 2 of the
device own the same IP address and MAC address, and network 1 and network 2 are used as hot
standby each other. When both network 1 and network 2 are normal, any of them is used to
communicate between the device and SAS. The device will automatically switch to the other
healthy network when one network is abnormal, which will not affect normal communication.
Taking a CPU module with four Ethernet ports as an example, each bit is corresponding with an 2
Ethernet port, i.e., Bit0, Bit1, Bit2 and Bit3 are corresponding with Ethernet port 1, Ethernet port 2,
Ethernet port 3 and Ethernet port 4 respectively. If a bond between Ethernet port 1 and Ethernet 2
is created, the setting [Cfg_NetPorts_Bond] is set as "3". The specific setting is shown as in
following figure.
Ethernet port 1
Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1 Setting Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1 Setting
Binary Bonding Bonding Binary
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value
0 0 1 1 0011 3 1 0 0 1 1001 9
Ethernet port 2
0 1 0 1 0101 5 0 1 1 0 0110 6
Ethernet port 3
1 0 1 0 1010 10 1 1 0 0 1100 12
Ethernet port 4
CPU Module
The switching logic of Active-Standby mode is:
Take the device's Ethernet ports 1 & 2 for example and assume that Port 1 and Port 2 are bonded,
and Port 1 is connected to NET 1 while Port 2 is connected to NET 2.
⚫ After the device is powered on, only Port 1 is activated when both NET 1 and NET 2 are
normal.
⚫ If NET 1 is abnormal, Port 2 will be activated if NET 2 is normal.
⚫ If NET1 is abnormal, Port 2 cannot be activated if NET 2 is also abnormal. The device will
keep trying on Port 1.
⚫ If Port 2 is working, the device will maintain this state even if NET 1 has been restored to
normal. It will be switched to Port 1 only if NET 2 is abnormal.
11. B01.Opt_NetMode
It is used to select the network method of the CPU module located in slot No.1
Five options are available, please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
1) Normal
If this option is selected, all Ethernet ports of the CPU module adopt "Normal" mode. In the

Date: 2021-02-02
2 Global Settings
“Normal” mode, there is no data redundancy mechanism.
2) 1-2:Normal, 3-4:HSR
If this option is selected, Ethernet port 1 and Ethernet port 2 of the CPU plug-in module adopt
"Normal" mode, and Ethernet port 3 and Ethernet port 4 of the CPU plug-in module adopt "HSR"
mode (IEC 62439-3 High-availability Seamless Redundancy) to realize data redundancy.
2 In the "HSR" mode, the principle of parallel operation to a single ring is applied to realize data
redundancy. For each message sent, the node sends two frames, one through each port. Both the
2 frames circulate in opposite directions over the ring. Every node forwards the frames it receives
from one port to another to reach the next node. When the originating sender node receives the
frame it sent, the sender node discards the frame to avoid loops.
3) 1-2:Normal, 3-4:PRP
"Normal" mode, and Ethernet port 3 and Ethernet port 4 of the CPU plug-in module adopt "PRP"
mode (IEC 62439-3 Parallel Redundancy Protocol) to realize data redundancy.
In the "PRP" mode, the data redundancy is realized in this way: the communication is performed in
parallel, i.e., the same data package is transmitted on both channels simultaneously. The received
package identity from one channel is compared with data package identity from the other channel.
If they are the same, the last package will be discarded.
4) 1-2:Normal, 3-4:RSTP
"Normal" mode, and Ethernet port 3 and Ethernet port 4 of the CPU plug-in module adopt "RSTP"
mode (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol).
In the "RSTP" mode, the data redundancy is realized in this way: RSTP serves for the
reorganization of the network structure in case of network path error. In other words, RSTP
reroutes the data to another path after the failure of a network path.
5) 1-2:PRP, 3-4:PRP
"PRP" mode (IEC 62439-3 Parallel Redundancy Protocol) to realize data redundancy, and
Ethernet port 3 and Ethernet port 4 of the CPU plug-in module adopt "PRP" mode (IEC 62439-3
Parallel Redundancy Protocol) to realize data redundancy.
In the "PRP" mode, the data redundancy is realized in this way: the communication is performed in
parallel, i.e., the same data package is transmitted on both channels simultaneously. The received
package identity from one channel is compared with data package identity from the other channel.
If they are the same, the last package will be discarded.
12. IP_SyslogServer**
It is used to set IP address of syslog server ** (**=01, 02, 03, 04), and the device can upload audit
log to syslog server. The setting is invalid unless cyber security is configured in the device. This

Date: 2021-02-02
Date: 2020-12-28
2 Global Settings
setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4.
Syslog is a communication protocol for message logging, it is used for security auditing in this
device.
13. En_IP_Whitelist
This setting is used to enable/disable the whitelist function of this device.
A whitelist is a list of IP addresses that are granted access to a certain system or protocol. When a
2
whitelist is used, all IP addresses are denied access, except those included in the whitelist. Please
configure this setting according to actual requirements
14. IP**_Whitelist
It is used to set No. ** IP address of the whitelist. (**=01...16) This setting is effective only when
the setting [En_IP_Whitelist] is enabled.
This setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4. Please configure this setting according to
actual requirements.
2.3.2 IEC61850 Communication Settings

2.3.2.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsComm SettingsIEC61850 Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalComm SettingsIEC61850 Settings
Table 2.3-2 IEC61850 communicaiton settings
IEDNAME
Disabled
En_Send_MMS_Qual_Chg
Enabled
IEC61850
Opt_DualNetMode_MMS
GB32890
Pcnt_Deadband 0~100.00 0.01 %
Threshold_ZeroDrift 0.001~0.500 0.001
Disabled
En_IEC62351_TCP_Port
Enabled

Date: 2021-02-02
2 Global Settings
Disabled
En_IEC61850_TCP_Port
Enabled

2 1. IEDNAME
It is used to set the identification of the device in IEC 61850 protocol.
It cannot be an empty string and shall be unique within an SCL file. Its length should be less than
20 characters comprising letters or digits or underline ( _ ). The setting must start with an alpha
character and it is case sensitive.
S s T t U u V v W w X x
Y y Z z _ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9
If this setting is modified, the IED name in the CID file of this device will be changed
simultaneously and vice versa.
It is recommended to configure this setting by SCD configuration in the PCS-Studio configuration

tool, and then download the new CID file to this device, i.e., it is not recommended to modify this
setting directly, so as to avoid inconsistence between "IEDName" in the CID file and the
"IEDName" in the SCD file.
As shown in the following figure, the length of the setting [IEDNAME] is also limited by the length
of "LDName":
Attribute“Inst”of the element“LDevic e”in the CID file of

[IED NAME]
this device
Length of LDName
In IEC 61850 Ed1: the length of "LDName" is not more than 32 characters.
In IEC 61850 Ed2: the length of "LDName" is not more than 64 characters.

Date: 2021-02-02
Date: 2020-12-28
2 Global Settings
2. En_Send_MMS_Qual_Chg
It is used to enable/disable the quality change upload function.
In GI (General Interrogation) or the integrity report to the communication client, or if the

communication client requests IEC 61850 MMS (Manufacturing Message Specification) qualities,
this device will update the qualities.
When the setting is set as "Enabled", and the "quality-change" attribute of "TrgOps" is enabled, 2
once any IEC 61850 MMS quality changes, this device will send the new quality spontaneously to
the communication client.
If the setting [En_IEC61850_TCP_Port] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be

unnecessary to be configured.
3. Opt_DualNetMode_MMS
It is used to select the MMS network communication mode with SCADA via network A and B of the
device.
IEC61850: Network mode with IEC 61850 protocol. In this mode, the instances of Report Control
Block (RCB) cannot be shared, so different clients should use different report instances to send
reports. The "IEC61850" mode is preferred overseas.
GB32890: Network mode with GB32890 standard. In this mode, for different clients meeting the
redundancy conditions of A and B networks, if one client enables an RCB instance, the device will
only send a report to the enabled client. When the enabled client is interrupted, another redundant
client will cancel and re-enable the RCB instance, and the device will send a report to the
re-enabled redundant client. The "GB32890" mode is a special mode widely used in China, which
needs to be used with clients supporting.

4. Pcnt_Deadband
It is used to set the change detection threshold for suddenly sending measurement value to the
SCADA via the device's Ethernet port using IEC 61850.
Only when the measurement value change which is greater than this setting will be sent to the
communication client (e.g.: local SCADA system, etc.) via the device's Ethernet port by using IEC
61850. It is expressed as a percentage value.
If the measurement values sent to the communication client changed within a small range too
frequently, but the communication client needs to ignore these frequent changes, please set this
setting to a bigger value.

Date: 2021-02-02
2 Global Settings
If the measurement values sent to the communication client are required to be more precise,
please set this setting to a smaller value.

2 5. Threshold_ZeroDrift
It is used to set measurement values zero drift suppression threshold.
For any measurement value which is sent to the communication client (for example, local SCADA
system, etc.) via the device's Ethernet port by using IEC 61850, if it is smaller than this setting, it
will be processed as "0".
If the measurement values sent to the communication client are relatively big, please set this
setting to a big value, so as to eliminate influence of zero drift.
If the measurement values sent to the communication client are relatively small, please set this
setting to a small value, so as to avoid too many measurement values being processed as "0"
mistakenly.

6. En_IEC62351_TCP_Port
It is used to enable/disable TCP port when using IEC62351 protocol.
To realize the station level IEC 62351 cyber security communication, please enable this setting
and configure certificate, private key, etc. of this device and corresponding IEC 62351 client.
If station level IEC 62351 cyber security communication is not required, please configure this
setting as "Disabled" to close the listening port of IEC 62351 protocol.
7. En_IEC61850_TCP_Port
It is used to enable/disable TCP port when using IEC61850 protocol.
If station level IEC 61850 communication is not required, please configure this setting as
"Disabled" to close the MMS listening port of IEC 61850 protocol.
2.3.3 IEC103 Communication Settings
2.3.3.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD

Date: 2021-02-02
Date: 2020-12-28
2 Global Settings
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsComm SettingsIEC103 Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalComm SettingsIEC103 Settings
Table 2.3-3 IEC103 communication settings

2
Current_Language
Opt_Caption_103 Fixed_Chinese
Fixed_English
Disabled
En_Broadcast_LAN1
Enabled
Disabled
En_Broadcast_LAN2
Enabled
Disabled
En_Broadcast_LAN3
Enabled
Disabled
En_Broadcast_LAN4
Enabled
DisturbData
Format_Wave_Sent
File
Pcnt_Deadband_Net 0~100.00 0.01 %
Period_Measmt_Net 0~65535 1 s
Disabled
En_IEC103_TCP&UDP_Port
Enabled
1. Opt_Caption_103
It is used to select the language of group caption of IEC 60870-5-103 protocol and NR network
103 protocol.
It is recommended to be set as "Fixed_Chinese" if the device communicate with SCADA in

Chinese.
The standard application of IEC 60870-5-103 protocol adopts a twisted pair EIA-485 connection

Date: 2021-02-02
2 Global Settings
over a distance up to 500m. This device also supports the NR network 103 protocol that is an
alternative to IEC 60870-5-103 and is applicable through Ethernet network.
2. En_Broadcast_LAN*
It is used to enable/disable broadcast of Ethernet port * (*=1, 2, 3, 4).

2 This setting is only used for NR network 103 protocol. If NR network IEC103 protocol is used, the
setting must be set as "Enabled".
Disabled: the device does not send UDP (User Datagram Protocol) messages through Ethernet
port * (*=1, 2, 3, 4) of the CPU plug-in module.
Enabled: the device sends UDP messages through Ethernet port * (*=1, 2, 3, 4).
If the setting [En_103_TCP&UDP_Port] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be

3. Format_Wave_Sent
It is used to set the data format for sending waveform list using NR network 103 protocol.
Two optionsare available:
DisturbData: Send the waveform list in ASDU23 mode
File: Send the waveform list in ASDU222 mode
If both ASDU23 mode and ASDU222 mode are supported onsite, it is recommended to configure
this setting as "File", because the waveform list can be transmitted faster.

4. Pcnt_Deadband_Net
It is used to set the change detection threshold for suddenly sending measurement value to the
SCADA via the device's Ethernet port using IEC 60870-5-103
Only when the measurement value change which is greater than this setting will be sent to the
communication client (for example, local SCADA system, etc.) via the device's Ethernet port using
NR network 103 protocol. It is expressed as a percentage value.
If the measurement values sent to the communication client changed within a small range too
frequently, but the communication client needs to ignore these frequent changes, please set this
setting to a bigger value.
If the measurement values sent to the communication client are required to be more precise,
please set this setting to a smaller value.
If the measurement value change is not required to be sent to the communication client, please
configure this setting as "0".

Date: 2021-02-02
Date: 2020-12-28
2 Global Settings

5. Period_Measmt_Net
It is used to set the time period for sending the measurement value to the communication client
(for example, local SCADA system, etc.) via the device's Ethernet port by using NR network 103 2
protocol.
If this device is not required send all measurement values to the communication client
spontaneously based on the integrity period, please configure this setting as "0".

6. En_IEC103_TCP&UDP_Port
It is used to enable/disable the TCP port and the UDP port when using NR network 103 protocol.
If NR network 103 communication is not required, please configure this setting as "Disabled" to
close the listening port of NR network 103 protocol.
When using NR network 103 protocol (network mode), al the settings in the
submenu MainMenu→Settings→Global Settings→Comm
Settings→IEC103 Settings need to be configued.
When using IEC 60870-5-103 protocol (serial connection mode), the

settings, [Opt_Caption_103], [Protocol_RS485-1], [Protocol_RS485-2],
[Baud_RS485-1], [Baud_RS485-2], [Addr_RS485-1], [Addr_RS485-2],
need to be configued.
2.3.4 DNP Communication Settings

2.3.4.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsComm SettingsDNP Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalComm SettingsDNP Settings

Date: 2021-02-02
2 Global Settings
Table 2.3-4 DNP communication settings
Disabled
En_TCP1_DNP
2 Enabled
Addr_Slave_TCP1_DNP 0~65519 1
Addr_Master_TCP1_DNP 0~65519 1
IP_Master_TCP1_DNP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
Opt_Map_TCP1_DNP 0~4 1
t_AppLayer_TCP1_DNP 1~5 1 s
t_KeepAlive_TCP1_DNP 0~7200 1 s
Disabled
En_UR_TCP1_DNP
Enabled
Disabled
En_MsgCtrlUR_TCP1_DNP
Enabled
Num_URRetry_TCP1_DNP 2~10 1
t_UROfflRetry_TCP1_DNP 1~5000 1 s
Class_BI_TCP1_DNP 0~3 1
Class_AI_TCP1_DNP 0~3 1
t_Select_TCP1_DNP 0~240 1 s
t_TimeSynIntvl_TCP1_DNP 0~3600 1 s
1-BISingleBit
Obj01DefltVar_TCP1_DNP
2-BIWithStatus
1-BIChWoutT
Obj02DefltVar_TCP1_DNP 2-BIChWithAbsTime
3-BIChWithRelTime
1-AI32Int
Obj30DefltVar_TCP1_DNP 2-AI16Int
3-AI32IntWoutF

Date: 2021-02-02
Date: 2020-12-28
2 Global Settings
4-AI16IntWoutF
5-AI32Flt
1-AI32IntEvWoutT
Obj32DefltVar_TCP1_DNP 2-AI16IntEvWoutT 2
5-AI32FltEvWoutT
1-AO32Int
Obj40DefltVar_TCP1_DNP 2-AO16Int
3-AO32Flt
Disabled
En_TCP2_DNP
Enabled
IP_Master_TCP2_DNP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
Disabled
En_UR_TCP2_DNP
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
1-BISingleBit
2-BIWithStatus

Date: 2021-02-02
2 Global Settings
1-BIChWoutT
3-BIChWithRelTime
2 1-AI32Int
2-AI16Int
Obj30DefltVar_TCP2_DNP 3-AI32IntWoutF
4-AI16IntWoutF
5-AI32Flt
1-AI32IntEvWoutT
Obj32DefltVar_TCP2_DNP 2-AI16IntEvWoutT
5-AI32FltEvWoutT
1-AO32Int
3-AO32Flt
Disabled
En_TCP3_DNP
Enabled
IP_Master_TCP3_DNP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
Disabled
En_UR_TCP3_DNP
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled

Date: 2021-02-02
Date: 2020-12-28
2 Global Settings
t_TimeSynIntvl_TCP3_DNP 0~3600 1 s 2
1-BISingleBit
2-BIWithStatus
1-BIChWoutT
3-BIChWithRelTime
1-AI32Int
2-AI16Int
4-AI16IntWoutF
5-AI32Flt
1-AI32IntEvWoutT
5-AI32FltEvWoutT
1-AO32Int
3-AO32Flt
Disabled
En_TCP4_DNP
Enabled
IP_Master_TCP4_DNP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

Date: 2021-02-02
2 Global Settings
Disabled
En_UR_TCP4_DNP
Enabled
Disabled
2 Enabled
1-BISingleBit
2-BIWithStatus
1-BIChWoutT
3-BIChWithRelTime
1-AI32Int
2-AI16Int
4-AI16IntWoutF
5-AI32Flt
1-AI32IntEvWoutT
5-AI32FltEvWoutT
1-AO32Int
3-AO32Flt

Date: 2021-02-02
Date: 2020-12-28
2 Global Settings
1. En_TCP*_DNP
It is used to enable/disable TCP port * when using DNP protocol (*=1, 2, 3, 4).
If network DNP communication is not required, please configure this setting as "Disabled" to close
the listening port of the network DNP protocol.

2
2. Addr_Slave_TCP*_DNP
It is used to set the device's DNP address for the network DNP session * (*=1, 2, 3, 4).
It should be consistent with corresponding setting value of the communication client (for example,
local SCADA system, master station in control center, etc.) for the network DNP session *.
If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be

configured.
3. Addr_Master_TCP*_DNP
It is used to set the DNP address of the master (i.e., the communication client) for the network
DNP session * (*=1, 2, 3, 4).
It must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client for the network
DNP session *.

configured.
4. IP_Master_TCP*_DNP
It is used to set the IP address of the master (i.e., the communication client) for the network DNP
session * (*=1, 2, 3, 4).
This setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4.
DNP session *.

configured.
5. Opt_Map_TCP*_DNP
It is used to configure the DNP communication point map for the network DNP session * (*=1, 2, 3,
4).
Five options are available, each of them corresponds to a communication point map
pre-configured by the PCS-Studio configuration tool.

configured.

Date: 2021-02-02
2 Global Settings
6. t_AppLayer_TCP*_DNP
It is used to set the timeout duration of the application layer for the network DNP session * (*=1, 2,
3, 4).
2 DNP session *.

configured.
7. t_KeepAlive_TCP*_DNP
It is used to set the heartbeat time interval for the network DNP session * (*=1, 2, 3, 4).
DNP session *.

configured.
8. En_UR_TCP*_DNP
It is used to to enable/disable the UR (Unsolicited Response) message function for the network
DNP session * (*=1, 2, 3, 4).
For the network DNP session *, if the communication client requires this device to support sending
UR (Unsolicited Response) messages, please configure this setting as "Enabled".

configured.
9. En_MsgCtrlUR_TCP*_DNP
The setting is used to determine the mode of sending Class 1, 2, 3 events from the network DNP
session * to the communication client spontaneously (*=1, 2, 3, 4).
Enabled: the communication client must activate UR reporting by enabling unsolicited application
function (Function code: 20). After activation, the network DNP session * of this device begins to
send Class 1, 2, 3 events to the communication client spontaneously.
Disabled: this device will send Class 1, 2, 3 events spontaneously to the communication client for
the network DNP session *.
If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] or [En_UR_TCP*_DNP] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will

be unnecessary to be configured.
10. Num_URRetry_TCP*_DNP
It is used to set the online retransmission number for sending the UR messages to the

Date: 2021-02-02
Date: 2020-12-28
2 Global Settings
communication client for the network DNP session * (*=1, 2, 3, 4).
DNP session *.

11. t_UROfflRetry_TCP*_DNP 2
It is used to set the offline retransmission interval for sending the UR messages to the
DNP session *.

12. Class_BI_TCP*_DNP
It is used to select the default event class generated by the binary input points to the
Four options are available:
0: If this option is selected, all the binary input points of this device will NOT generate any event to
the communication client for the network DNP session *.
1: If this option is selected, all the binary input points of this device will generate class 1 events to
DNP session *.

configured.
13. Class_AI_TCP*_DNP
It is used to select the default event class generated by the binary input points to the
Four options are available:
0: If this option is selected, all the binary input points of this device will NOT generate any event to

Date: 2021-02-02
2 Global Settings
2 the communication client for the network DNP session *.
DNP session *.

configured.
14. t_Select_TCP*_DNP
It is used to set the selection timeout duration of the remote control and the remote regulation for
the network DNP session * (*=1, 2, 3, 4).
DNP session *.

configured.
15. t_TimeSynIntvl_TCP*_DNP
It is used to set the time interval of the time synchronization function for the network DNP session *
(*=1, 2, 3, 4).
DNP session *.

configured.
16. Obj01DefltVar_TCP*_DNP
It is used to select the default variation for object group 1 ("Obj01") for the network DNP session *
(*=1, 2, 3, 4).
1-BISingleBit: Binary Input (Single Bit)—packet format
If this option is selected, "Object group 1, variation 1" will be adopted to report the current value
of a binary input point. Variation 1 objects contain a single-bit binary input state without status
flags.
2-BIWithStatus: Binary Input—With Status flags
of a binary input point. Variation 2 objects contain a status octet that includes the state of the

Date: 2021-02-02
Date: 2020-12-28
2 Global Settings
binary input.
DNP session *.

configured.
17. Obj02DefltVar_TCP*_DNP 2
(*=1, 2, 3, 4).
Three options are available:
1-BIChWoutT: Binary Input status Change event—Without Time
If this option is selected, "Object group 2, variation 1" will be adopted to report events related to
a binary input point. Variation 1 objects contain an octet for reporting the state of the input and
status flags.
2-BIChWithAbsTime: Binary Input status Change event—With Absolute Time
status flags, and the absolute time when the event occurred.
3-BIChWithRelTime: Binary Input status Change event—With Relative Time
status flags, and the relative time when the event occurred. A preceding common
time-of-occurrence (CTO) object, group 51, establishes the basis of the relative time.
DNP session *.

configured.
(*=1, 2, 3, 4).
Five options are available:
1-AI32Int: Analog Input—32-bit Integer with flag
of an analog input point. Variation 1 objects contain a flag octet and a 32-bit, signed integer value.
2-AI16Int: Analog Input—16-bit Integer with flag

Date: 2021-02-02
2 Global Settings
If this option is selected, “"Object group 30, variation 2" will be adopted to report the current
value of an analog input point. Variation 2 objects contain a flag octet and a 16-bit, signed integer
value.
3-AI32IntWoutF: Analog Input—32-bit Integer Without Flag
2 of an analog input point. Variation 3 objects contain a 32-bit, signed integer value.
4-AI16IntWoutF: Analog Input—16-bit Integer Without Flag
of an analog input point. Variation 4 objects contain a 16-bit, signed integer value.
5-AI32Flt: Analog Input—32-bit single-precision, Floating-point with flag
of an analog input point. Variation 5 objects contain a flag octet and a 32-bit single-precision,
floating-point value.
DNP session *.

configured.
(*=1, 2, 3, 4).
1-AI32IntEvWoutT: Analog Input—32-bit Integer Event Without Time
an analog input point. Variation 1 objects contain a flag octet and a 32-bit, signed integer value.
2-AI16IntEvWoutT: Analog Input—16-bit Integer Event Without Time
an analog input point. Variation 2 objects contain a flag octet and a 16-bit, signed integer value.
5-AI32FltEvWoutT: Analog Input—32-bit single-precision, Floating-point Event Without Time
an analog input point. Variation 5 objects contain a flag octet and a 32-bit single-precision,
DNP session *.

configured.

Date: 2021-02-02
Date: 2020-12-28
2 Global Settings
(*=1, 2, 3, 4).
1-AO32Int: Analog Output status—32-bit Integer with flag
If this option is selected, "Object group 40, variation 1" will be adopted to report the status of an
2
analog output point. Variation 1 objects contain a flag octet and a 32-bit, signed integer value.
2-AO16Int: Analog Output status—16-bit Integer with flag
analog output point. Variation 2 objects contain a flag octet and a 16-bit, signed integer value.
3-AO32Flt: Analog Output status—32-bit single-precision, Floating-point with flag
analog output point. Variation 3 objects contain a flag octet and a 32-bit single-precision,
DNP session *.

configured.
2.3.5 Modbus Communication Settings
2.3.5.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsComm SettingsModbus Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalComm SettingsModbus Settings
Table 2.3-5 Modbus communication settings
Disabled
En_Modbus_TCP_Port
Enabled
1. En_Modbus_TCP_Port
It is used to enable/disable the TCP port when using Modbus protocol
If network Modbus communication is not required, please configure this setting as "Disabled" to

Date: 2021-02-02
2 Global Settings
close the listening port of network Modbus protocol.
2.3.6 SV Communication Settings

2.3.6.1 Access Path
2 ⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsComm SettingsSV Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalComm SettingsSV Settings
Table 2.3-6 SV communication settings
SampleRate_SV 0~65535 1
t_Dly_Interp_Net_SV 1500~15000 1 μs
t_Dly_Interp_P2P_SV 600~1500 1 μs
NetMode
Opt_RecvMode_SV P2P
Resv
1. SampleRate_SV
It is used to set sampling rate of the received SV data from the merging units.
It must be the same as the sampling rate of the transmitted SV data of the merging units.
2. t_Dly_Interp_Net_SV
It is used to set the backward time delay of SV interpolation for networking mode. This backward
time delay is used to meet the data quantity & quality requirements by the SV interpolation.
Base on engineering experience, its value is recommended to be kept as the default value
"2000μs". Please consult our engineer if modification is required.
3. t_Dly_Interp_P2P_SV
It is used to set the backward time delay of SV interpolation for peer-to-peer (P2P) mode. This
backward time delay is used to meet the data quantity & quality requirements by the SV
interpolation.
Base on engineering experience, its value is recommended to be kept as the default value "850μs".

Date: 2021-02-02
Date: 2020-12-28
2 Global Settings
Please consult our engineer if modification is required.
4. Opt_RecvMode_SV
It is used to select SV receiving mode.
NetMode: networking mode

2
If there is communication equipment (e.g., Ethernet switch, etc.) in the SV communication link,
please select "NetMode".
If "NetMode" is selected, all the devices must share the same clock source.
P2P: peer-to-peer (P2P) mode
If there is no communication equipment in the SV communication link, please select "P2P".
Resv: reserved
2.4 Disturbance Fault Recording Settings
2.4.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsDFR Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalGlobal SettingsDFR Settings
2.4.2 Setting List

Table 2.4-1 Disturbance fault recording settings
RecDur_PreTrigDFR 0.000~1.000 0.001 s
RecDur_PostFault 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
MaxRecDur_PostTrigDFR 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
1. RecDur_PreTrigDFR
It is used to set the waveform recorded duration before the trigger element operates.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements:
⚫ If this setting is configured as a too big value, the waveform file size will be too large, and

Date: 2021-02-02
2 Global Settings
more storage space and transmission bandwidth will be required.
⚫ If this setting is configured as a too small value, the waveform file may be insufficient for fault
analysis.
Base on engineering experience, this setting is recommended to be configured as "0.100s".
2. RecDur_PostFault
2 It is used to set the waveform recorded duration after the DFR trigger element drops off.
If there are 2 or more DFR trigger elements, this setting refers to the waveform recorded duration
after the last trigger element drops off.
analysis.
Base on engineering experience, this setting is recommended to be configured according to the

DFR trigger mode as shown in the following table.
DFR trigger mode Recommended value
"Level trigger" (Including high-level trigger, low-level trigger) 0.100s
"Edge trigger" (Including falling-edge trigger, rising-edge trigger, bilateral-edge trigger) 1.000s
The combination of "Level trigger" and "Edge trigger" 1.000s
3. MaxRecDur_PostTrigDFR
It is used to set the maximum waveform recorded duration after the trigger element operates.
If there are 2 or more DFR trigger elements, this setting refers to the maximum waveform recorded
duration after the 1st trigger element operates.
analysis.
Base on engineering experience, this setting is recommended to be configured as "1.000s".

Date: 2021-02-02
Date: 2020-12-28
2 Global Settings
2.5 Label Settings
2.5.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsLabel Settings

2
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalGlobal SettingsLabel Settings
2.5.2 Setting List

Table 2.5-1 Label settings
Bxx.Name_**_GCommLink Max. 30 characters
Bxx.Name_**_SVCommLink Max. 30 characters
1. Bxx.Name_**_GCommLink
It is used to set the user-defined part of GOOSE communication link** in the module located in slot
No.xx, and this user-defined part is designed to customize the GOOSE communication link name.
It will determine the corresponding part of the alarm signals, logic link settings, statistic data, etc.
The maximum permissible length of this setting is 30 characters, and this setting is case sensitive.
S s T t U u V v W w X x
Y y Z z _ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9
2. Bxx.Name_**_SVCommLink
It is used to set the user-defined part of SV communication link** in the module located in slot
No.xx, and this user-defined part is designed to customize the SV communication link name. It will
determine the corresponding part of the alarm signals, logic link settings, statistic data, etc.

Date: 2021-02-02
2 Global Settings
2 S s T t U u V v W w X x
Y y Z z _ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9
2.6 Clock Synchronization Settings
2.6.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsClockSyn Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalGlobal SettingsClockSyn Settings
2.6.2 Setting List

Table 2.6-1 Clock synchronization settings
Conventional
Opt_TimeSyn SAS 1
NoTimeSyn
OffsetHour_UTC -12~12
OffsetMinute_UTC 0~60
IP_Server_SNTP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
IP_StandbyServer_SNTP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
Enabled
En_ConvModeSNTP
Disabled
DST.En Enabled

Date: 2021-02-02
Date: 2020-12-28
2 Global Settings
Disabled
DST.OffsetMinute 0~255 1
Jan
Feb 2
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
DST.MonthInYear_Start 1
Jul
Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
1st
2nd
DST.WeekInMonth_Start 3rd 1
4th
Last
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
DST.DayInWeek_Start Wednesday 1
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
DST.HourInDay_Start 0~23 1
DST.MonthInYear_End Jan 1

Date: 2021-02-02
2 Global Settings
Feb
Mar
Apr
2 May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
1st
2nd
DST.WeekInMonth_End 3rd 1
4th
Last
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
DST.DayInWeek_End Wednesday 1
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
DST.HourInDay_End 0~23 1
1. Opt_TimeSyn
It is used to select the clock synchronization mode of the device.

Date: 2021-02-02
Date: 2020-12-28
2 Global Settings
⚫ Conventional
When the setting [Opt_TimeSyn] is set as "Conventional", the following clock synchronization
signals can be accepted by this device. However, if none of the following signals is received, an
alarm signal named “Alm_TimeSyn” will be issued, and the clock synchronization mode will
change to the "SAS" mode automatically.
IRIG-B: IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level, TTL level or BNC

2
PPS: Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level, binary input or BNC
IEEE 1588: Clock message based on IEEE 1588 via Ethernet network
⚫ SAS
When the setting [Opt_TimeSyn] is set as "SAS", the following clock synchronization signals can
be accepted by this device. However, if none of the following signals is received, an alarm signal
named "Alm_TimeSyn" will be issued.
SNTP: Unicast (point-to-point) & broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network
Clock messages: IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, Modbus protocol and DNP3.0 protocol
⚫ NoTimeSyn
If the clock synchronization function is not required, please select "NoTimeSyn", and the device
will not send time synchronization alarm signal.
The clock message via IEC103 protocol is INVALID when the device
receives the IRIG-B signal through RS-485 port.
2. OffsetHour_UTC
It is used to set the offset hour of local time from UTC.
The settings [OffsetHour_UTC] and [OffsetMinute_UTC] cooperate to determine the local time
zone of this device.
3. OffsetMinute_UTC
It is used to set the offset minute of local time from UTC.
The settings [OffsetHour_UTC] and [OffsetMinute_UTC] cooperate to determine the local time
zone of this device.
4. IP_Server_SNTP
It is used to set the IP address of the server when SNTP time synchronization mode is selected.

Date: 2021-02-02
2 Global Settings
It must be the same as corresponding setting value of the SNTP server.
If there is no SNTP server, please configure this setting as "0.0.0.0".
5. IP_StandbyServer_SNTP
2 It is used to set the IP address of the standby server when SNTP time synchronization mode is
selected.
When device failed to connect the SNTP server, it will try to connect the standby SNTP server.
It must be the same as corresponding setting value of the standby SNTP server.
If there is no standby SNTP server, please configure this setting as "0.0.0.0".
6. En_ConvModeSNTP
It is used to enable/disable receive the SNTP message as the backup clock synchronization
source while hardware-based clock (IRIG-B, IEEE 1588 or PPS) is lost when the setting
[OptTimeSyn] is configured as "Conventional". However, the alarm "Alm_TimeSyn" will still be
issued, so as to indicate the failure of the conventional clock synchronization.
7. DST.En
It is used to enable/disable Daylight Saving Time (DST).
8. DST.OffsetMinute
It is used to set the minute offset of DST, i.e. the difference between DST time and local time.
If the setting [DST.En] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be

configured.
9. DST.MonthInYear_Start
It is used to set the month in year when daylight time starts.

configured.
10. DST.WeekInMonth_Start
It is used to set the week in month when daylight time starts.

configured.

Date: 2021-02-02
Date: 2020-12-28
2 Global Settings
11. DST.DayInWeek_Start
It is used to set the day in week when daylight time starts.

configured.
12. DST.HourInDay_Start
2
It is used to set the hour in day when daylight time starts.

configured.
13. DST.MonthInYear_End
It is used to set the month in year when daylight time ends.

configured.
14. DST.WeekInMonth_End
It is used to set the week in month when daylight time ends.

configured.
15. DST.DayInWeek_End
It is used to set the day in week in when daylight time ends.

configured.
16. DST.HourInDay_End
It is used to set the hour in day when daylight time ends.

configured.

Date: 2021-02-02
2 Global Settings

Date: 2021-02-02
Date: 2020-12-28
Table of Contents
3.1 Basic Parameter Calculation .......................................................................... 3-1

3.2 Fault Detector (FD) .......................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 3-2 3

3.3 Optical Pilot Channel (FO) .............................................................................. 3-3

3.3.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.3.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 3-3
3.4 Current Differential Protection (87L) .............................................................. 3-6

3.4.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.4.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 3-6
3.5 Pilot Distance Protection (85) ....................................................................... 3-14

3.5.1 Access Path ........................................................................................................................ 3-14
3.5.2 Setting List .......................................................................................................................... 3-14
3.6 Pilot Directional Earth-fault Protection (85)................................................. 3-20

3.6.1 Access Path ........................................................................................................................ 3-20
3.6.2 Setting List .......................................................................................................................... 3-20
3.7 DPFC Distance Protection (21D) .................................................................. 3-22

3.7.1 Access Path ........................................................................................................................ 3-22
3.7.2 Setting List .......................................................................................................................... 3-23
3.8 Distance Protection (21L) ............................................................................. 3-23

Date: 2021-02-02
3.8.1 Access Path ........................................................................................................................ 3-23
3.8.2 Setting List .......................................................................................................................... 3-23
3.9 Out-of-step Protection (78) ........................................................................... 3-54

3.9.1 Access Path ........................................................................................................................ 3-54
3.9.2 Setting List .......................................................................................................................... 3-54
3 3.10 Distance SOTF Protection (21SOTF) .......................................................... 3-56

3.10.1 Access Path ...................................................................................................................... 3-56
3.10.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................ 3-57
3.10.3 Calculation Principle ......................................................................................................... 3-58
3.11 Phase Overcurrent Protection (50/51P) ..................................................... 3-60

3.11.1 Access Path ...................................................................................................................... 3-60
3.11.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................ 3-61
3.12 Phase Current SOTF Protection (50PSOTF) .............................................. 3-78

3.12.1 Access Path ...................................................................................................................... 3-78
3.12.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................ 3-78
3.13 Earth Fault Protection (50/51G) .................................................................. 3-80

3.13.1 Access Path ...................................................................................................................... 3-80
3.13.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................ 3-80
3.14 Residual Current SOTF Protection (50GSOTF) ......................................... 3-95

3.14.1 Access Path ...................................................................................................................... 3-95
3.14.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................ 3-95
3.15 Negative-sequence Overcurrent Protection (50/51Q) ............................... 3-96

3.15.1 Access Path ...................................................................................................................... 3-96
3.15.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................ 3-96

Date: 2021-02-02
3.16 Phase Overvoltage Protection (59P) ........................................................ 3-104

3.16.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-104
3.16.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-104
3.16.3 Calculation Principle ....................................................................................................... 3-106
3.17 Residual Overvoltage Protection (59G) ................................................... 3-109

3.17.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-109
3.17.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-109 3

3.18 Negative-sequence Overvoltage Protection (59Q) ................................... 3-111

3.18.1 Access Path ..................................................................................................................... 3-111
3.18.2 Setting List ....................................................................................................................... 3-111
3.18.3 Calcualtion Principle ....................................................................................................... 3-112
3.19 Phase Undervoltage Protection (27P) .......................................................3-113

3.19.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-113
3.19.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-114
3.20 Overfrequency Protection (81O)................................................................3-119

3.20.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-119
3.20.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-119
3.21 Underfrequency Protection (81U)............................................................. 3-121

3.21.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-121
3.21.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-121
3.22 Frequency Rate-of-change Protection (81R) ........................................... 3-122

3.22.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-122
3.22.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-123
3.23 Reverse Power Protection (32R) .............................................................. 3-124
PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-c

Date: 2021-02-02
3.23.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-124
3.23.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-124
3.24 Undercurrent Protection (37) .................................................................... 3-126

3.24.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-126
3.24.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-126
3 3.25 Breaker Failure Protection (50BF) ............................................................ 3-129

3.25.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-129
3.25.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-129
3.26 Stub Differential Protection (87STB) ........................................................ 3-133

3.26.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-133
3.26.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-133
3.27 Dead Zone Protection (50DZ).................................................................... 3-135

3.27.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-135
3.27.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-135
3.28 Broken Conductor Protection (46BC) ...................................................... 3-136

3.28.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-136
3.28.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-136
3.29 Pole Discrepancy Protection (62PD) ........................................................ 3-137

3.29.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-137
3.29.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-138
3.30 Transfer Trip (TT) ....................................................................................... 3-139

3.30.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-139
3.30.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-139
3-d PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2021-02-02
3.31 Trip Logic (TRP) ......................................................................................... 3-140

3.31.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-140
3.31.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-140
3.32 Automatic Reclosure (79).......................................................................... 3-141

3.32.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-141
3.32.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-142 3

3.33 Fault Location (FL) .................................................................................... 3-151

3.33.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-151
3.33.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-151
List of Tables
Table 3.2-1 Fault detector settings ............................................................................................ 3-2
Table 3.3-1 Optical pilot channel settings................................................................................. 3-3
Table 3.4-1 Current differential protection settings ................................................................. 3-6
Table 3.5-1 Pilot distance protection settings ........................................................................ 3-14
Table 3.6-1 Pilot directional earth-fault protection settings ................................................. 3-20
Table 3.7-1 DPFC distance protection settings ...................................................................... 3-23
Table 3.8-1 Distance protection settings ................................................................................ 3-23
Table 3.9-1 Out-of-step protection settings ............................................................................ 3-54
Table 3.10-1 Distance SOTF protection Settings ................................................................... 3-57
Table 3.11-1 Phase overcurrent protection settings .............................................................. 3-61
Table 3.12-1 Phase current SOTF protection settings .......................................................... 3-78
Table 3.13-1 Earth fault protection settings ........................................................................... 3-80
Table 3.14-1 Residual current SOTF protection settings ...................................................... 3-95
Table 3.15-1 Negative-sequence overcurrent protection settings ....................................... 3-96
Table 3.16-1 Phase overvoltage protection settings ........................................................... 3-104
PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-e

Date: 2021-02-02
Table 3.17-1 Residual overvoltage protection settings ....................................................... 3-109
Table 3.18-1 Negative-sequence overvoltage protection settings ......................................3-111
Table 3.19-1 Phase undervoltage protection settings ......................................................... 3-114
Table 3.20-1 Overfrequency protection settings .................................................................. 3-119
Table 3.21-1 Underfrequency protection settings................................................................ 3-121
Table 3.22-1 Frequency rate-of-change protection settings ............................................... 3-123
Table 3.23-1 Reverse power protection settings .................................................................. 3-124
3 Table 3.24-1 Undercurrent protection settings .................................................................... 3-126
Table 3.25-1 Breaker failure protection settings .................................................................. 3-129
Table 3.26-1 Stub differential protection settings ................................................................ 3-133
Table 3.27-1 Dead zone protection settings ......................................................................... 3-135
Table 3.28-1 Broken conductor protection settings ............................................................ 3-136
Table 3.29-1 Pole discrepancy protection settings.............................................................. 3-138
Table 3.30-1 Transfer trip settings ......................................................................................... 3-139
Table 3.31-1 Trip logic settings .............................................................................................. 3-140
Table 3.32-1 AR settings ......................................................................................................... 3-142
Table 3.33-1 Fault location settings....................................................................................... 3-151
3-f PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2021-02-02
3.1 Basic Parameter Calculation
For the setting calculation in relation to power system operating conditions, it shall base on the
usual operating conditions as its calculation reference. Usual operating conditions usually refer to
normal operating conditions or the maintenance case that adjacent line or a component protected
is out of service. For the system whose operating mode changes greatly, the operating conditions
which setting calculation refers to should be confirmed by dispatching department according to
specific cases.
For all the calculation equations listed in this instruction manual, the results including current,
voltage and impedance are all expressed in the form of secondary actual value, unless it is 3
specifically mentioned. Setting values of the line protection shall be transformed into secondary
side value before inputting in the relay.
Formulas for converting primary settings to secondary ones are shown as below:
1
⚫ 𝐼SEC = 𝐼PRIM × CT ratio
Where:
ISEC is the secondary current setting
IPRIM is the primary current setting
I1n
CT ratio = ( I1n : Primary rated current; I2n : Secondary rated current).
I 2n
1
⚫ 𝑈SEC = 𝑈PRIM × VT ratio
Where:
USEC is the secondary voltage setting
UPRIM is the primary voltage setting
U1n
VT ratio = ( U1n : Primary rated voltage; U2n : Secondary rated voltage)
U 2n
CT ratio
⚫ 𝑍SEC = 𝑍PRIM × VT ratio
Where:
Z SEC is the secondary impedance setting

Date: 2021-02-02
ZPRIM is the primary impedance setting
All current settings, voltage settings and impedance settings are secondary
value converted from primary value by CT ratio and VT ratio.
Zero-sequence current or voltage settings are configured according to 3I0

or 3U0, negative-sequence current or voltage settings are configured
according to I2 or U2, and positive-sequence current or voltage settings are
3 configured according to I1 or U1.
3.2 Fault Detector (FD)
3.2.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsFD Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsFD Settings
3.2.2 Setting List

Table 3.2-1 Fault detector settings
FD.DPFC.I_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
FD.ROC.3I0_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
FD.NOC.I2_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
Disabled
FD.NOC.En
Enabled
1. FD.DPFC.I_Set
It is used to set current setting of DPFC current fault detector element.
It should be higher than maximum variation of load current and typically 0.2In. For line with heavy
load fluctuation like those for electric railway, rolling mill or aluminum-smelting, the setting should
be increased properly so that frequent pickup of the device could be avoided.

Date: 2021-02-02
2. FD.ROC.3I0_Set
It is used to set current setting of residual current fault detector element.
It should be greater than maximum three phases unbalance current. All protection functions
relevant to zero-sequence current will be controlled by this setting. Therefore, it is the most
sensitive among all zero-sequence overcurrent elements.
The settings of fault detector element at both ends should be set based on
the same primary value.
3
3. FD.NOC.I2_Set
It is used to set current setting of negative-sequence current fault detector element.
It should be greater than maximum negative-sequence unbalance current. All protection functions
relevant to negative-sequence current will be controlled by this setting. Therefore, it is the most
sensitive among all negative-sequence overcurrent elements.
4. FD.NOC.En
It is used to enable/disable negative-sequence current fault detector element.
3.3 Optical Pilot Channel (FO)
3.3.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsRmt CommCh Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsRmt CommCh

Settings
3.3.2 Setting List

Table 3.3-1 Optical pilot channel settings
FO.LocID 0~65535 1
FO.RmtID 0~65535 1
64
FO.BaudRate kbps
2048

Date: 2021-02-02
G.703
FO.Protocol
C37.94
FOx.Nx64k_C37.94 1~12 1
Ext
FOx.Opt_ClkSrc
Int
Disabled
3 FOx.En
Enabled
1. FO.LocID
It is used to set identity code of the device at local end.
The setting principle is same with the setting [FO.RmtID] which is shown as bellow.
2. FO.RmtID
It is used to set identity code of the device at remote end.
In order to ensure reliability of the device when digital communication channel is applied, settings
[FO.LocID] and [FO.RmtID] are provided as identity code to distinguish uniquely the device at
remote end using same channel.
Under normal conditions, the identity code of the device at local end should be different with that at
remote end. In addition, it is recommended that the identity code of all devices, i.e., the setting
[FO.LocID], should be unique in the substation. The setting range is from 0 to 65535.
⚫ Back-to-back connection directly or via multiplexers
The setting [FO.LocID] should be different between the local device and the remote device.
The local device's [FO.LocID] should be as same as the remote device's [FO.RmtID].
The end with greater [FO.LocID] is chosen as the master end for sampling synchronism, the other
end with smaller [FO.LocID] is slave end.
⚫ Loopback test
The device's [FO.LocID] should be equal to the device's [FO.RmtID].
The setting [FO.LocID] is packaged in the message frame and transmitted to the remote end.
When the [FO.LocID] of the device at remote end received by local device is same to the setting
[FO.RmtID] of local device, the message received from the remote end is valid, and protection
information involved in message is read. When these settings are not matched, the message is
considered as invalid and protection information involved in message is ignored, corresponding
alarms will be issued.

Date: 2021-02-02
3. FO.BaudRate
It is used to set baud rate of the communication channel.
The communication rate can be set as 64kbits/s or 2048kbits/s.
For the dedicated optical fiber connection, both 64kbits/s and 2048kbits/s are suitable. But
2048kbits/s is recommended under this situation.
For the multiple connection with external communication equipment such as PCM or SDH, it
should be set as the requirement of communication equipment.
4. FO.Protocol
It is used to select protocol type, G.703 or C37.94

3
G.703 is the protocol which is used to define data frame transferred via physical/electrical
characteristic of hierarchical digital interfaces.
C37.94 is the protocol which used to define data frame transferred via optical fiber interfaces.
For the dedicated optical fiber connection, both G.703 and C37.94 are suitable. And C37.94 is
recommended under this situation.
For the multiple connection with external communication equipment such as PCM or SDH, And
G.703 is recommended under this situation. By the way, the MUX equipment should be used as
photoelectric conversion device.
For double channels, if one channel uses dedicated optical fiber and the other channel uses
multiple connection, G.703 is recommended under this situation.
5. FOx.Nx64k_C37.94
It is the times of 64kbits/s, which is an N×64kbits/s standard defined by IEEE C37.94 standard.
If there is no special requirement for the external communication equipment, it is recommended to

set as 12.
6. FOx.Opt_ClkSrc
It is used to select the communication clock used by sampling synchronization in current

differential protection, internal clock or external clock.
Ext: external clock
Int: internal clock
The device can communicate in two modes via multiplex channel or dedicated optical fibre.
The device transmits and receives messages based on respective clocks, which are called
transmit clock (i.e. clock TX) and receive clock (i.e. clock RX) respectively. Clock RX is fixed to be
extracted from message frame, which can ensure no slip frame and no error message received.
Clock TX has two options:
⚫ Use internal crystal clock, which is called internal clock (master clock)

Date: 2021-02-02
⚫ Use external clock (slave clock)
Depend on the clock used by the device at both ends, there are three modes.
⚫ Mode 1: Master-master mode (both ends use internal clock)
⚫ Mode 2: Slave-slave mode (both ends use external clock)
⚫ Mode 3: Master-slave mode (one of them uses internal clock, the other uses external clock)
If the device uses multiplex PCM/SDH channel, the setting [FOx.Opt_ClkSrc] at both ends should
be set accordingly.
3 ⚫ The setting [FOx.Opt_ClkSrc] is recommended set as "Int" when the function, "Retiming", of
the communication equipment is disabled.
⚫ The setting [FOx.Opt_ClkSrc] is recommended set as "Ext" when the function, "Retiming", of
the communication equipment is enabled.
If the device uses dedicated optical fibre channel, mode 1 and mode 3 can be used. Mode 1 is
recommended in considering simplification to user, i.e. the setting [FOx.Opt_ClkSrc] at both ends
should be set as "Int".
7. FOx.En
It is used to enable/disable channel x.
3.4 Current Differential Protection (87L)
3.4.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsDiff Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsDiff Settings
3.4.2 Setting List

Table 3.4-1 Current differential protection settings
87L.I_Pkp (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
87L.I_Alm (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
87L.I_Pkp_CTS (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
87L.K_Cr_CT 0.200~10.000 0.001
87L.I_Knee1 0.050~2.000 0.001 A

Date: 2021-02-02
87L.I_Knee2 0.050~10.000 0.001 A
87L.Slope1 0.500~0.750 0.001
87L.Slope2 0.500~1.000 0.001
87L.t_Op_Neutral 0.040~100.000 0.001 s
87L.XC1L (40~60000)/In 1 Ω
87L.XC0L (40~60000)/In 1 Ω
87L.Z_LocReac (40~60000)/In 1 Ω
3
87L.Z_LocGndReac (40~60000)/In 1 Ω
87L.Z_RmtReac (40~60000)/In 1 Ω
87L.Z_RmtGndReac (40~60000)/In 1 Ω
Disabled
87L.En
Enabled
Disabled
87L.En_DPFC1
Enabled
Disabled
87L.En_DPFC2
Enabled
Disabled
87L.En_Biased1
Enabled
Disabled
87L.En_Biased2
Enabled
Disabled
87L.En_Neutral
Enabled
Disabled
87L.En_InterTrp
Enabled
Disabled
87L.En_LocDiff
Enabled
Disabled
87L.En_CapCurrComp
Enabled

Date: 2021-02-02
Disabled
87L.En_CTS_Blk
Enabled
1. 87L.I_Pkp
It is used to set minimum pickup current setting of current differential protection.
It should be greater than the maximum unbalance current under the normal load conditions. If the
3 capacitive current is too big to be ignored, it should be considered. Considering the CT errors and
other measuring errors, additional safety margin should be also added. Normally, the
corresponding primary current is recommended to set as 400A~700A.
When the setting [87L.En_CapCurrComp] is set as "Disabled", the sensitivity will be decreased,
and the setting can be appropriately increased. The corresponding primary current is
recommended to set as 500A~800A.
Its typical value is 0.3A.
2. 87L.I_Alm
It is used to set current setting of differential current abnormality alarm.
When the propagation delay of the channel is uncertain, so the currents at both ends cannot
accurately be synchronized. For large load current, larger differential current may be generated so
as to lead to undesired operation of current differential protection. Hence, differential current
needs to be supervised.
According to unbalanced differential current under load conditions, if differential current is greater
than the threshold value, the device will issue an alarm to indicate that differential current is
abnormal.
The threshold of discriminating differential current abnormality needs to cooperate with pickup
setting of current differential protection, at the same time it should be greater than unbalanced
current under normal conditions.
Its recommended value is 0.3A.
3. 87L.I_Pkp_CTS
It is used to set current setting of differential protection when CT circuit failure.
When CT circuit fails, this pickup setting of current differential protection will be switched into
[87L.I_Pkp_CTS] if the setting [87L.En_CTS_Blk] is set as "Disabled".
If the setting [87L.En_CTS_Blk] is set as "Enabled", current differential protection will be blocked
even the differential current exceed the setting [87L.I_Pkp_CTS]. Generally, this setting should be
greater than the maximal load current to prevent the possible maloperation under heavy load
condition. It reduces the sensitivity, but the reliability is increased.

Date: 2021-02-02
Its recommended value is 1A.
4. 87L.K_Cr_CT
It is used to set the factor of CT ratio.
If CTs' ratio at two ends of the transmission line is different, the currents be converted to one
reference value. Regarding local end as the referenced end, differential current and restraint
current can be calculated since the current of the opposite end is converted by the setting.
[87L.K_Cr_CT]. If the CT ratio on both ends are same, this setting should be set as "1" on both
ends, and its recommended value is 1.
IM1n and IM2n are primary rated current and secondary rated current of terminal M respectively
3
IN1n and IN2n are primary rated current and secondary rated current of terminal N respectively
The secondary rated current is considered internally, so only primary rated current should be
calculated.
Suppose CT ratio is as below, and then, IM1n is not less than IN1n
Terminal M Terminal N
𝐼𝑀1𝑛 𝐼𝑁1𝑛
𝐾M = 𝐾𝑁 =
𝐼𝑀2𝑛 𝐼𝑁2𝑛
𝐼𝑁1𝑛
[87L.K_Cr_CT]=1.00 [87𝐿. 𝐾_𝐶𝑟_𝐶𝑇] =
𝐼𝑀1𝑛
For example:
Terminal M Terminal N
KM = 2500: 1 𝐾𝑁 = 1250: 5
[87L.K_Cr_CT]=1.00 [87L.K_Cr_CT]=0.50
5. 87L.I_Knee1
It is used to set current setting of knee point 1 for steady-state current differential element.
It should be greater than the restrained current corresponding to point A as shown in figure below.
The sensitivity and reliability should be considered, and the undesired operation for external fault
with CT saturation should be avoided.
Its recommended value is 0.5A.

Date: 2021-02-02
IDiffΦ
k=1
k2
k1
IH
IBiasΦ
A Knee1 Knee2
3 Where:
K1 and K2 are the slope setting [87L.Slope1] and [87L.Slope2] respectively.
Knee1 and Knee2 are the restraint current setting [87L.I_Knee1] and [87L.I_Knee2] respectively.
6. 87L.I_Knee2
It is used to set current setting of knee point 2 for steady-state current differential element.
It should be greater than the setting [87L.I_Knee1]. It is indicated in the figure as above. The
sensitivity and reliability should be considered, and the undesired operation for external fault with
CT saturation should be prevented.
If more reliability is required, the setting could be decreased, for example, 1A. If more sensitivity is
required, the setting could be increased, for example, 3A. Because the DPFC differential element
can meet the sensitivity requirement, it is not recommended to increase the setting due to
sensitivity requirement.
7. 87L.Slope1
It is used to set the slope 1 of steady-state current differential element. It is indicated in the figure
as above.
The sensitivity and reliability should be considered, and the unwanted operation for external fault
with CT saturation should be prevented.
Its recommended value is 0.5.
If more reliability is required, the setting could be increased, for example, 0.6. Normally it should
be less than the setting [87L.Slope2]. Because the DPFC differential element can meet the
sensitivity requirement, it can not be less than 0.5.
8. 87L.Slope2
It is used to set the slope 2 of steady-state current differential element. It is indicated in the figure
as above.
The sensitivity and reliability should be considered, and the unwanted operation for external fault

Date: 2021-02-02
with CT saturation should be prevented.
If more reliability is required, the setting could be increased, for example, 0.8. If more sensitivity is
required, the setting could be increased, for example, 0.6. Normally, it should be greater than the
setting [87L.Slope1].
9. 87L.t_Op_Neutral
It is used to set the time delay for neutral current differential element.
Its recommended value is 0.04s.
10. 87L.XC1L
3
It is used to set positive-sequence capacitive impedance of the transmission line.
Its recommended value is 10000Ω.
The setting principle is same with the [87L.XC0L] which is shown as bellow.
11. 87L.XC0L
It is used to set zero-sequence capacitive impedance of the transmission line.
If the setting [87L.En_CapCurrComp] is set as "Enabled", they should be set based on actual
parameters of the whole line (secondary value). If actual parameters are not available, the
following data can be used as a reference. The capacitive impedance and capacitive current of
overhead line per 100km based on different voltage class:
Voltage Class 87L.XC1L 87L.XC0L Capacitance current

220kV 3700Ω 5260Ω 34A
330kV 2860Ω 4170Ω 66A
500kV 2590Ω 3790Ω 111A
750kV 2242Ω 3322Ω 193A
If the setting [87L.En_CapCurrComp] is set as "Disabled", the setting will not be used in
caculation. They can be set as any value within their setting range.
Its recommended value is 10000Ω. Normally, zero-sequence capacitive impedance must be equal
to or greater than positive-sequence capacitive impedance.
12. 87L.Z_LocReac
It is used to set impedance setting of reactor of the local end.
If shunt reactor is equipped with the local substation, it shall be set as the secondary value of
shunt reactor of local substation, otherwise, it can be set as "60000Ω". When the logic setting
[87L.En_CapCurrComp] is set as "Disabled", this setting will not be used in the calculation and
can be set as any value within its setting range.

Date: 2021-02-02
13. 87L.Z_LocGndReac
It is used to set the impedance setting of ground reactor of the local end.
If ground reactor is equipped with the local substation, it shall be set as the secondary value of
ground reactor of local substation, otherwise, it can be set as "60000Ω". When the logic setting
14. 87L.Z_RmtReac
3 It is used to set the impedance setting of reactor of remote line.
If shunt reactor is equipped with the remote substation, it shall be set as the secondary value of
shunt reactor of remote substation, otherwise, it can be set as "60000Ω". When the logic setting
15. 87L.Z_RmtGndReac
It is used to set the impedance setting of ground reactor of remote line.
If ground reactor is equipped with the remote substation, it shall be set as the secondary value of
ground reactor of remote substation, otherwise, it can be set as "60000Ω". When the logic setting
16. 87L.En
It is used to enable/disable current differential protection.
It is a general setting of current differential protection. Its recommended value is "Enabled".
17. 87L.En_DPFC1
It is used to enable/disable stage 1 of DPFC current differential element.
The precondition is that the setting [87L.En] is set as "Enabled". Its recommended value is
"Enabled".
18. 87L.En_DPFC2
It is used to enable/disable stage 2 of DPFC current differential element.
"Enabled".

Date: 2021-02-02
19. 87L.En_Biased1
It is used to enable/disable stage 1 of steady-state current differential element.
"Enabled".
20. 87L.En_Biased2
It is used to enable/disable stage 2 of steady-state current differential element.
"Enabled".
21. 87L.En_Neutral
3
It is used to enable/disable neutral current differential element.
"Enabled".
22. 87L.En_InterTrp
It is used to enable/disable current differential inter-tripping element.
"Enabled".
When a fault associated with high resistance occurs in the outlet of long transmission line, the
device of local end, which is near the fault, can pick up immediately, but, considering the influence
of a considerable power source, the device of the remote end, which is far from the fault, cannot
pick up due to inapparent fault component. In order to avoid this case, any protection (such as
distance protection, overcurrent protection and etc.) of local end operates, inter-trip signal of
corresponding phase will be sent to the remote end. After receiving the inter-trip signal, the device
of the remote end can pick up, if corresponding basic differential condition is met and the setting
[87L.En_InterTrp] is set as "Enabled", the faulty phase will be inter-tripped. This setting is
generally set as "Enabled".
23. 87L.En_LocDiff
It is used to enable/disable local independent current differential protection.
If the setting [87L.En_LocDiff] is set as "Enabled", then independent current differential protection
is enabled which means local current differential protection can operate without permissive signal
from remote end.
When CT circuit failure occurs at one end, FD and current differential protection on the end may
operate. However, FD on the other end will not operate and not send any permissive signal of
current differential protection. Therefore, the current differential protection will not maloperate.
If the operation is not allowed for differential protection during CT circuit failure under normal
condition, then [87L.En_LocDiff] should be set as "Disabled".

Date: 2021-02-02
24. 87L.En_CapCurrComp
It is used to enable/disable capacitive current compensation for current differential protection.
If the capacitive current should be compensated to increase the sensitivity, it should be set as
"Enabled".
25. 87L.En_CTS_Blk
It is used to enable/disable current differential protection blocked during CT circuit failure.
If CT circuit failure associated with internal fault or pickup due to system disturbance is detected,
the device will show two kinds of behavior.
3 If logic setting [87L.En_CTS_Blk] (differential protection being blocked during CT circuit failure) is
set as "Enabled", the current differential protection will be blocked.
If logic setting [87L.En_CTS_Blk] is set as "Disabled" and the current differential current of the
faulty phase is more than the differential current setting [87L.I_Pkp_CTS] during CT circuit failure,
the current differential protection will operate.
3.5 Pilot Distance Protection (85)
3.5.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsPilot Scheme Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsPilot Scheme Settings
3.5.2 Setting List

Table 3.5-1 Pilot distance protection settings
POTT
85.Opt_Mode PUTT
Blocking
Disabled
85.En_Ch_PhSeg
Enabled
Disabled
85.En_WI
Enabled
85.U_UV_WI 0.000~200.000 0.001 V

Date: 2021-02-02
Disabled
85.En_WI_Pkp
Enabled
Disabled
85.En_Trp_Send
Enabled
Disabled
85.En_PilotTrp_Send
Enabled
Disabled
3
85.En_52b_Send
Enabled
Disabled
85.En_52b_Echo
Enabled
Disabled
85.Z.En
Enabled
Disabled
85.En_Unblocking1
Enabled
Phase-to-phase
85.Opt_Ch1
Phase-to-ground
85.t_Unblocking1 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
85.t_DPU_Blocking1 0.000~1.000 0.001 s
85.t_DPU_CR1 0.000~1.000 0.001 s
85.t_DDO_CR1 0.000~1.000 0.001 s
Disabled
85.ZX.En
Enabled
85.t_DPU_ZX 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
1. 85.Opt_Mode
It is used to select pilot scheme.
POTT: permissive overreaching transfer trip scheme
PUTT: permissive underreaching transfer trip scheme

Date: 2021-02-02
Blocking: blocking scheme
2. 85.En_Ch_PhSeg
It is used to enable/disable phase-segregated signal scheme.
Generally, for parallel lines or multi-circuits, this setting is recommended to be set as "Enabled".
The permissive scheme can use PLC channel or optic fiber channel as communication channel.
These signals, which are used to initiate sending permissive signal, can use phase-segregated
signal scheme or common signal scheme. For pilot protection adopting common signal scheme,
the signal "85-x.Recv1" is used. For pilot protection adopting phase-segregated signal scheme,
3 three signals are used, they are "85-x.Recv1" for phase A, "85-x.RecvB" for phase B and
"85-x.RecvC" for phase C.
3. 85.En_WI
It is used to enable/disable weak infeed scheme.
If the device locates on weak end, it should be enabled. Otherwise, it should be disabled.
4. 85.U_UV_WI
It is undervoltage setting of weak infeed logic.
This setting is set to be lower than the minimum voltage value under normal operation condition.
Usually, it is recommeded be set as 60% rated phase voltage.
In case of an internal fault on the line, the fault current supplied to the fault point from the weak
power source is very small or even nil, both forward and reverse element do not operate. Thus, the
pilot distance protection could not operate at both ends of the line. The weak infeed logic is used
for this condition.
When the weak infeed logic is enabled ([85.En_WI] is set as "Enabled"), ,if the voltage is lower
than the setting [85.U_UV_WI] after the device picks up, upon receiving the signal from the remote
end, the weak infeed end will echo the signal back for 200ms. In this way, the pilot distance
protection on the other end can operate.
5. 85.En_WI_Pkp
It is used to enable/disable the device pick up at weak infeed end.
This setting is recommended to be set as "Enabled" for the weak infeed end when the device can
not pick up for internal faults in some extreme situations.
6. 85.En_Trp_Send
It is used to enable/disable sending permissive signals by any tripping. If only the pilot protection
(pilot distance protection and pilot directional earth-fault protection) is required to trigger sending
permissive signal, this setting can be set as "Disabled".
7. 85.En_PilotTrp_Send
It is used to enable/disable sending permissive signals when the pilot protection (pilot distance

Date: 2021-02-02
protection and pilot directional earth-fault protection) operates.
This setting is recommended to be set as "Enabled"
This logic is a supplement for the pilot protection. When the pilot protection operates, the
permissive signal will be extended to make sure the device on the other end can reliably receive
the permissive signal and operate.
8. 85.En_52b_Send
It is used to enable/disable sending permissive signals by the circuit breaker open position when
the device picks up.
9. 85.En_52b_Echo 3
It is used to enable/disable echo permissive signals by the circuit breaker open position when the
device does not pick up.
10. 85.Z.En
It is used to enable/disable pilot distance protection.
11. 85.En_Unblocking1
It is used to enable/disable unblocking scheme.
This setting is recommended to be set as "Enabled" when unblocking scheme is required due to
pilot channel failure.
When pilot channel fails, the device may not receive signal from the remote end. For this case,
pilot distance protection can adopt unblocking scheme. While pilot channel is blocked, the
signaling equipment will provide a contact to the device as unblocking signal. When the device
receives unblocking signal from the signaling equipment, it will recognize channel failure, and
unblocking signal will be taken as permissive signal temporarily.
12. 85.Opt_Ch1
It is used to select PLC channel for pilot channel 1.
Phase-to-phase: PLC channel uses phase-to-phase loop for transmitting signals.
Phase-to-ground: PLC channel uses phase-to-ground loop for transmitting signals.
It is recommended that the blocking logic adopts phase-to-ground channel, and the permissive
logic adopts phase-to-phase channel.
There is no similar setting for pilot channel 2, because pilot directional

earth-faut protection adopts phase-to-ground mode, and does not check
fault types in unblocking scheme.

Date: 2021-02-02
13. 85.t_Unblocking1
It is used to set the releasing time of unblocking scheme for pilot channel 1 when the setting
[85.En_Unblocking1] is set as "Enabled".
14. 85.t_DPU_Blocking1
It is used to set time delay for blocking scheme of pilot distance protection operation.
If the setting [85.Opt_PilotMode] is set as "Blocking", blocking scheme will operate with a time
delay [85.t_DPU_Blocking1] if both forward element operates and blocking signal is not received.
This time delay should be longer than the summation of the propagation time delay of pilot
3 channel and pickup time of fault detector element. In addition, the time dalay should prevent from
maloperation under current reversal condtion. The recommended setting principle is as follows.
[85.t_DPU_Blocking1]=t1+t2+Δt
Where:
t1 is the propagation time delay of pilot channel.
t2 is the pickup time of fault detector element, typical time is 5ms.
Δt is the margin time, in order to prevent pilot distance protection from undesired operating under
current reversal condtion, it normally should be more than 50ms
15. 85.t_DPU_CR1
It is used to set pickup time delay of current reversal logic.
The equation is as bellow.
[85.t_DPU_CR1]=T1-T2-T3
Where:
T1 indicates that the transfer time during which the direction judgement of the device that is near
the fault in local line changes from reverse direction to forward direction when a fault happens to
the adjacent line. It is necessary to consider the operating time of the device that is near the fault
in the adjacent line, the operating time of the contact, the operating time of the circuit breaker and
the operating time of the forward direction element.
T2 indicates the channel delay, which shall be set according to the actual channel delay.
T3 indicates the time during which the remote device sends the signal, which shall be set
according to the actual sending time of the remote device.
Based on the above setting principles, if the fastest operating time of the device in the adjacent
line is calculated as 10ms, the fastest operating time of the contact is calculated as 5ms, the
fastest operating time of the circuit breaker is calculated as 25ms, and the fastest operating time of
the forward direction element is calculated as 15ms, then:
T1=10ms+5ms+25ms+15ms=55ms

Date: 2021-02-02
The maximum channel delay is calculated as 15ms (T2=15ms).
The sending time of the remote device is calculated as 20ms (T3=20ms).
[85.t_DPU_CR1]=55ms-15ms-20ms=20ms
Hence, the setting is recommended to set as 20ms.
The setting should be not less than 10ms, which ensure that the current reversal logic does not
incorrectly detect for internal fault.
16. 85.t_DDO_CR1
It is used to set dropout time delay of current reversal logic.

3
The equation is as bellow.
[85.t_DDO_CR1]=T1+T2
Where:
T1 indicates the transfer time difference between local device whose direction judgement changes
from reverse direction to forward direction and remote device whose direction judgement changes
from forward direction to reverse direction, and a certain time margin shall be considered.
T2 indicates the dropoff time of the channel delay, which shall be set according to the actual
situation of the channel.
Based on the above setting principles, if the transfer time difference between local device and
remote device is calculated as 10ms, the dropoff time of the channel delay is calculated as 15ms,
then:
[85.t_DDO_CR1]=10ms+15ms=25ms
Hence, the setting is recommended to set as 25ms.
If the dropoff of the forward direction element of the remote device is slow, T2 needs to increase
the margin appropriately according to the actual situation.
17. 85.ZX.En
It is used to enable/disable zone extension of pilot distance protection.
Zone extension is usually used in combination with automatic reclosure. It can be activated
internally by pilot protection, the integrated automatic reclosure or externally by a binary input.
When pilot protection is out of service due to pilot channel failure or no pilot protection is provided,
as a supplement of pilot protection, zone extension can clear the fault within the whole line
instantaneously. Different from pilot distance protection, zone extension can also operate for
external close up fault in parallel line, but power supply can be restored by AR. So zone extension
should be blocked when AR is out of service and is not ready.
18. 85.t_DPU_ZX
It is used to set pickup time delay for zone extension of pilot distance protection

Date: 2021-02-02
The delay time is set in accordance with the application type, usually to zero or a very small delay.
3.6 Pilot Directional Earth-fault Protection (85)
3.6.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsPilot Scheme Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
3 Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsPilot Scheme Settings
3.6.2 Setting List

Table 3.6-1 Pilot directional earth-fault protection settings
Disabled
85.DEF.En
Enabled
Disabled
85.DEF.En_BlkAR
Enabled
Disabled
85.DEF.En_IndepCh
Enabled
Disabled
85.En_Unblocking2
Enabled
85.t_Unblocking2 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
85.DEF.3I0_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
85.DEF.t_DPU 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
85.t_DPU_CR2 0.000~1.000 0.001 s
85.t_DDO_CR2 0.000~1.000 0.001 s
1. 85.DEF.En
It is used to enable/disable pilot directional earth-fault protection.
2. 85.DEF.En_BlkAR
It is used to enable/disable pilot directional earth-fault protection operate to block AR.

Date: 2021-02-02
Disabled: selective phase tripping and not blocking AR
Enabled: three-phase tripping and blocking AR
3. 85.DEF.En_IndepCh
It is used to enable/disable independent channel for pilot directional earth-fault protection.
Disabled: pilot directional earth-fault protection sharing same channel with pilot distance protection
Enabled: pilot directional earth-fault adopting independent pilot channel
Pilot directional earth-fault protection can share the channel with pilot distance protection or use
independent channel to initiate sending signal.
3
When the setting [85.DEF.En_IndepCh] is set as "Disabled", pilot directional earth-fault protection
which comprises permissive scheme and blocking scheme can share pilot channel 1 with pilot
distance protection.
When the setting [85.DEF.En_IndepCh] is set as "Enabled", pilot directional earth-fault protection
which comprises permissive scheme and blocking scheme uses independent pilot channel 2.
For underreach mode (PUTT), pilot directional earth-fault should adopt independent pilot channel
2 and work as overreach mode. That means [85.DEF.En_IndepCh] should set as "Enabled".
4. 85.En_Unblocking2
It is used to enable/disable unblocking scheme for pilot DEF via pilot channel 2. This setting is
recommended to be set as "Enabled" when unblocking scheme is required due to pilot channel
failure.
If pilot directional earth-fault protection uses independent channel 2 to initiate sending and
receiving signal, the signal will not be received from remote end when pilot channel fails. For this
case, pilot protection can adopt unblocking scheme. While pilot channel is blocked, the signaling
equipment will provide a contact to the device as unblocking signal. When the device receives
unblocking signal from the signaling equipment, it will recognize channel failure, and unblocking
signal will be taken as permissive signal temporarily.
5. 85.t_Unblocking2
It is used to set pickup releasing time delay of unblocking scheme for pilot channel 2.
It is used to set the releasing time of unblocking scheme for pilot channel 2 when the setting
[85.En_Unblocking2] is set as "Enabled".
6. 85.DEF.3I0_Set
It is used to set zero-sequence current setting of pilot directional earth-fault protection.
It should ensure that pilot directional earth-fault protection is sensitive enough when an earth fault
happens in the remote end of the line.

Date: 2021-02-02
7. 85.DEF.t_DPU
It is used to set time delay of pilot directional earth-fault protection.
8. 85.t_DPU_CR2
It is used to set time delay pickup for current reversal logic when pilot directional earth-fault
protection adopts independent pilot channel 2.
Generally, there is a time delay in pilot directional earth-fault protection. Hence, the setting can be
decreased appropriately if the time delay can meet the requirement of corret operation during
current reversal. Otherwise, the setting shall be set refer to the setting [85.t_DPU_CR1].
3 9. 85.t_DDO_CR2
It is used to set time delay dropoff for current reversal logic when pilot directional earth-fault
protection adopts independent pilot channel 2.
Generally, there is a time delay in pilot directional earth-fault protection. Hence, the setting can be
decreased appropriately if the time delay can meet the requirement of corret operation during
current reversal. Otherwise, the setting shall be set refer to the setting [85.t_DDO_CR1].
In the case of parallel lines, pilot distance protection shall have the
capability to protect the whole line when an earth fault happens.
When VT circuit failure is detected, pilot distance protection and pilot

directional earth-fault protection will be disabled automatically.
When CT circuit failure is detected, pilot directional earth-fault protection

will be disabled automatically.
Under pole disagreement condition, pilot directional earth-fault protection

will be disabled automatically.
3.7 DPFC Distance Protection (21D)
3.7.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsDPFC Dist Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsDPFC Dist Settings

Date: 2021-02-02
3.7.2 Setting List

Table 3.7-1 DPFC distance protection settings
21D.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
Disabled
21D.En
Enabled

3
1. 21D.Z_Set
It is used to set impedance setting of DPFC distance protection.
It is an additional function of distance zone1 protection to accelerate its operation for the close-up
fault. It is set according to underreaching scheme, usually take 60%~70% of the line impedance,
and as for double-circuit lines, 50% of the line impedance is recommended.
2. 21D.En
It is used to enable/disable DPFC distance protection.
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable DPFC distance protection. If the line length
is too short (for example, less than 10km) or the SIR (Source Impedance Ratio) is too large
(SIR>30).
This setting is recommended to be set as "Disabled".
3.8 Distance Protection (21L)
3.8.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsDistProt Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsDistProt Settings
3.8.2 Setting List

Table 3.8-1 Distance protection settings
21L.Ang_Alpha 5~30 1 °
21L.Ang_Beta 5~30 1 °

Date: 2021-02-02
21L.LoadEnch.phi 5~50 1 °
21L.LoadEnch.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L.I_PSBR (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
Mho
21L.ZG.Opt_Characteristic
Quad
Mho
3 21L.ZP.Opt_Characteristic
Quad
21L1.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001
21L1.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001
21L1.phi1_Reach 30~89 1 °
21L1.ZG.RCA 0~45 1 °
21L1.ZG.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L1.ZG.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L1.ZG.R_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L1.ZG.phi_Shift 0~30 1 °
21L1.ZG.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
Disabled
21L1.ZG.En
Enabled
Disabled
21L1.ZG.En_BlkAR
Enabled
Disabled
21L1.ZG.En_3I0
Enabled
Disabled
21L1.ZG.En_NeuDir_Blk
Enabled
Disabled
21L1.ZG.En_NegDir_Blk
Enabled
21L1.ZP.RCA 0~45 1 °
21L1.ZP.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

Date: 2021-02-02
21L1.ZP.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L1.ZP.R_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L1.ZP.phi_Shift 0~30 1 °
21L1.ZP.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
Disabled
21L1.ZP.En
Enabled
Disabled
3
21L1.ZP.En_BlkAR
Enabled
Disabled
21L1.ZP.En_NegDir_Blk
Enabled
Disabled
21L1.LoadEnch.En
Enabled
Disabled
21L1.En_PSBR
Enabled
Disabled
21L1.En_ReacLine
Enabled
Forward
21L2.DirMode Reverse
Non_Directional
21L2.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001
21L2.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001
21L2.phi1_Reach 30~89 1 °
21L2.ZG.RCA 0~45 1 °
21L2.ZG.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L2.ZG.Z_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L2.ZG.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

Date: 2021-02-02
21L2.ZG.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
21L2.ZG.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
Disabled
21L2.ZG.En
Enabled
Disabled
21L2.ZG.En_BlkAR
Enabled
3 Disabled
21L2.ZG.En_3I0
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
21L2.ZP.RCA 0~45 1 °
21L2.ZP.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L2.ZP.Z_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L2.ZP.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L2.ZP.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
21L2.ZP.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
Disabled
21L2.ZP.En
Enabled
Disabled
21L2.ZP.En_BlkAR
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
21L2.En_ShortDly
Enabled

Date: 2021-02-02
Disabled
21L2.LoadEnch.En
Enabled
Disabled
21L2.En_PSBR
Enabled
Disabled
21L2.En_ReacLine
Enabled
Forward
3
Non_Directional
21L3.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001
21L3.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001
21L3.phi1_Reach 30~89 1 °
21L3.ZG.RCA 0~45 1 °
21L3.ZG.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L3.ZG.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L3.ZG.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
21L3.ZG.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
Disabled
21L3.ZG.En
Enabled
Disabled
21L3.ZG.En_BlkAR
Enabled
Disabled
21L3.ZG.En_3I0
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled

Date: 2021-02-02
Disabled
Enabled
21L3.ZP.RCA 0~45 1 °
21L3.ZP.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L3.ZP.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

3 21L3.ZP.R_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L3.ZP.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
21L3.ZP.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
Disabled
21L3.ZP.En
Enabled
Disabled
21L3.ZP.En_BlkAR
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
21L3.En_ShortDly
Enabled
Disabled
21L3.LoadEnch.En
Enabled
Disabled
21L3.En_PSBR
Enabled
Disabled
21L3.En_ReacLine
Enabled
Forward
Non_Directional
21L4.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001

Date: 2021-02-02
21L4.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001
21L4.phi1_Reach 30~89 1 °
21L4.ZG.RCA 0~45 1 °
21L4.ZG.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L4.ZG.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

3
21L4.ZG.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
21L4.ZG.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
Disabled
21L4.ZG.En
Enabled
Disabled
21L4.ZG.En_BlkAR
Enabled
Disabled
21L4.ZG.En_3I0
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
21L4.ZP.RCA 0~45 1 °
21L4.ZP.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L4.ZP.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L4.ZP.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
21L4.ZP.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

Date: 2021-02-02
Disabled
21L4.ZP.En
Enabled
Disabled
21L4.ZP.En_BlkAR
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
3 Disabled
21L4.En_ShortDly
Enabled
Disabled
21L4.LoadEnch.En
Enabled
Disabled
21L4.En_PSBR
Enabled
Disabled
21L4.En_ReacLine
Enabled
Forward
Non_Directional
21L5.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001
21L5.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001
21L5.phi1_Reach 30~89 1 °
21L5.ZG.RCA 0~45 1 °
21L5.ZG.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L5.ZG.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L5.ZG.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
21L5.ZG.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

Date: 2021-02-02
Disabled
21L5.ZG.En
Enabled
Disabled
21L5.ZG.En_BlkAR
Enabled
Disabled
21L5.ZG.En_3I0
Enabled
Disabled
3
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
21L5.ZP.RCA 0~45 1 °
21L5.ZP.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L5.ZP.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L5.ZP.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
21L5.ZP.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
Disabled
21L5.ZP.En
Enabled
Disabled
21L5.ZP.En_BlkAR
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
21L5.En_ShortDly
Enabled
Disabled
21L5.LoadEnch.En
Enabled

Date: 2021-02-02
Disabled
21L5.En_PSBR
Enabled
Disabled
21L5.En_ReacLine
Enabled
Forward
3 Non_Directional
21L6.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001
21L6.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001
21L6.phi1_Reach 30~89 1 °
21L6.ZG.RCA 0~45 1 °
21L6.ZG.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L6.ZG.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L6.ZG.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
21L6.ZG.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
Disabled
21L6.ZG.En
Enabled
Disabled
21L6.ZG.En_BlkAR
Enabled
Disabled
21L6.ZG.En_3I0
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled

Date: 2021-02-02
21L6.ZP.RCA 0~45 1 °
21L6.ZP.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L6.ZP.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L6.ZP.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

3
21L6.ZP.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
Disabled
21L6.ZP.En
Enabled
Disabled
21L6.ZP.En_BlkAR
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
21L6.En_ShortDly
Enabled
Disabled
21L6.LoadEnch.En
Enabled
Disabled
21L6.En_PSBR
Enabled
Disabled
21L6.En_ReacLine
Enabled
21L.PilotFwd.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001
21L.PilotFwd.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001
21L.PilotFwd.phi1_Reach 30~89 1 °
21L.PilotFwd.ZG.RCA 0~45 1 °
21L.PilotFwd.ZG.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L.PilotFwd.ZG.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

Date: 2021-02-02
21L.PilotFwd.ZG.R_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
Disabled
21L.PilotFwd.ZG.En_3I0
Enabled
Disabled
21L.PilotFwd.ZG.En_NeuDir_Blk
Enabled
Disabled
3 21L.PilotFwd.ZG.En_NegDir_Blk
Enabled
21L.PilotFwd.ZP.RCA 0~45 1 °
21L.PilotFwd.ZP.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L.PilotFwd.ZP.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L.PilotFwd.ZP.R_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
Disabled
21L.PilotFwd.ZP.En_NegDir_Blk
Enabled
Disabled
21L.PilotFwd.LoadEnch.En
Enabled
Disabled
21L.PilotFwd.En_PSBR
Enabled
Disabled
21L.PilotFwd.En_ReacLine
Enabled
21L.PilotRev.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001
21L.PilotRev.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001
21L.PilotRev.phi1_Reach 30~89 1 °
21L.PilotRev.ZG.RCA 0~45 1 °
21L.PilotRev.ZG.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L.PilotRev.ZG.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L.PilotRev.ZG.R_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
Disabled
21L.PilotRev.ZG.En_3I0
Enabled

Date: 2021-02-02
21L.PilotRev.ZP.RCA 0~45 1 °
21L.PilotRev.ZP.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L.PilotRev.ZP.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
21L.PilotRev.ZP.R_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
Disabled
21L.PilotRev.LoadEnch.En
Enabled
Disabled
3
21L.PilotRev.En_PSBR
Enabled
Disabled
21L.PilotRev.En_ReacLine
Enabled
1. 21L.Ang_Alpha
It is used to set the angle of directional line in the second quadrant (when the setting
[21Lx.DirMode] is set as "Forward") or fourth quadrant (when the setting [21Lx.DirMode] is set as
"Reverse") for quadrilateral phase-to-ground distance element.
If the line positive-sequence angle is large, for example, more than 80 degree, or the system
behind the device is weak power source, this setting should be increaseded appropriately,
considering the error of line paramter and measured impedance.
Its recommended value is 15°.
2. 21L.Ang_Beta
It is used to set the angle of directional line in the fourth quadrant (when the setting [21Lx.DirMode]
is set as "Forward") or second quadrant (when the setting [21Lx.DirMode] is set as "Reverse") for
quadrilateral distance element.
3. 21L.LoadEnch.phi
It is used to set angle setting of load trapezoid characteristics.
It should be set according to the maximum load impedance angle (φLoad_Max).
The recommended setting principle is as below.
[21L.LoadEnch.phi]>φLoad_Max+φθ
φθ is the margin, and its recommended value is 5°.

Date: 2021-02-02
4. 21L.LoadEnch.R_Set
It is used to set resistance setting of load trapezoid characteristics.
It should be less than the minimum impedance measured during heavy load conditions.
Assume that the maximum permissive load is Smax (MVA), and corresponding minimum voltage is
Umin (kV) and then under this operation condition, the recommended setting principle is as below:
2
𝑈𝑚𝑖𝑛
[21𝐿. 𝐿𝑜𝑎𝑑𝐸𝑛𝑐ℎ. 𝑅_𝑆𝑒𝑡] < 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝑅𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 ×
𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥
𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 is the coefficient, and its recommended value is 0.7.

3 5. 21L.I_PSBR
It is used to set current setting for power swing blocking releasing
The following setting rule is recommended.
[21𝐿. 𝐼_𝑃𝑆𝐵𝑅] = 1.1 × 𝐼𝐿𝑜𝑎𝑑_𝑚𝑎𝑥
ILoad_max is the maximum load current of the line.
6. 21L.ZG.Opt_Characteristic
It is used to select the characteristics of phase-to-ground distance element.
Mho: mho characteristics
Quad: quadrilateral characteristics
7. 21L.ZP.Opt_Characteristic
It is used to select the characteristics option of phase-to-phase distance element.
Mho: mho characteristics
Quad: quadrilateral characteristics
8. 21L*.DirMode
It is used to select direction characteristics for zone * of distance protection (*=2~6)
Zone1 is internally fixed as forward direction.
Forward: forward direction
Reverse: reverse direction
Non-directional: none direction
9. 21L*.Real_K0
It is used to set real component of zero-sequence compensation coefficient for zone * of distance
protection (*=1~6)
The calculation equation is:

Date: 2021-02-02
𝑍̇0𝐿 − 𝑍̇1𝐿
[21𝐿 ∗. 𝑅𝑒𝑎𝑙_𝐾0] = 𝑅𝑒𝑎𝑙 { }
3𝑍̇1𝐿
Z0L and Z1L are zero and positive sequence impedance of the line respectively.
10. 21L*.Imag_K0
It is used to set imaginary component of zero-sequence compensation coefficient for zone * of

distance protection (*=1~6)
𝑍̇0𝐿 − 𝑍̇1𝐿
[21𝐿 ∗. 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑔_𝐾0] = 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑔 {
3𝑍̇1𝐿
} 3
11. 21L*.phi1_Reach
It is used to set phase angle of positive-sequence impedance for zone i of distance protection.
(*=1~6)
𝑋1
[21𝐿𝑖. 𝑝ℎ𝑖1_𝑅𝑒𝑎𝑐ℎ] = 𝑡𝑎𝑛−1 ( )
𝑅1
X1 and R1 are positive-sequence reactance and resistance of the line respectively.
12. 21L*.ZG.RCA
It is used to set downward offset angle of the reactance line for zone * of quadrilateral
phase-to-ground distance element. (*=1~6)
The setting is used to prevent phase-to-ground distance element from overreaching during the
fault with resistance. The setting is associated with the setting [21L*.En_ReacLine]. And its value
is valid when the setting [21L*.En_ReacLine] is set as "Enabled".
The setting is recommended to be set according to the maximum fault resistance considered for
phase-to-ground fault.
13. 21L*.ZG.Z_Set
It is used to set impedance setting of zone * of phase-to-ground distance element. (*=1~6)
It is common impedance setting of phase-to-ground distance element (Mho and Quad

characteristics)
➢ For Zone 1
Zone1 is expected to protect the most part of the line. The recommended setting principle is:
[21L1. ZG. ZSet ] = Krel × Z1L

Date: 2021-02-02
Krel is the coefficient, normally 70%~85% is used.
Z1𝐿 is the positive-sequence line impedance.
Where overhead lines are connected in parallel or operate in close proximity for the whole or part
of their length, mutual coupling exists between the two circuits. For the case where one circuit of a
parallel line is out of service and earthed at both ends, an earth fault on the remote busbar may
result in maloperation of phase-to-ground zone 1.
In this case, it is recommended to reduce the setting. Krel is recommended to be set as 0.7 or
less. It should prevent maloperation when a fault occurs on the remote busbar of line.
3 ➢ For Zone 2
The setting should be sensitive enough to the earth fault on the remote end of the protected line,
and coordinates with the setting of zone 1 of the adjacent line. For more complex power system,
for instance, If there is a transformer or there are many adjacent lines connected to the remote bus,
the coordination should be changed accordingly.
To coordinate with zone 1 of the adjacent line, the recommended setting principle is:
[21L2.ZG.Z_Set]=K1×(ZL+KZmin×Zdz1)
ZL is positive-sequence impedance of the protected line.
Zdz1 is [21L1.ZG.Z_Set] in the adjacent line.
KZmin is the minimum value between positive-sequence infeed coefficient and zero-sequence
infeed coefficient under all the operation conditions.
K1 is the coeffiecient, 0.7~0.8 is recommended.
In the above equation, KZ follows the equation.
KZ=Iadj/Iloc
Iadj is positive-sequence current on the adjacent line when a fault happens to the adjacent line.
Iloc is positive-sequence current on the protected line when a fault happens to the adjacent line.
It should be noted that the setting should be greater than 1.2×ZL to make sure adequate sensitivity
is acheived. If it is not satisfied based on above setting rule, then zone2 of the protected line
should coordinate with zone2 of the adjacent line, in both impedance setting and time delay
setting.
For parallel circuit, the setting tends to underreach due to mutual coupling. Therefore, it is
recommended to increase the setting.
➢ For Zone 3
Zone3 is both the backup for the protected line and the remote back for the adjacent line. Thus, it
should coordinate with the setting of zone 2 of the adjacent line. For more complex power system,
for instance, if there is a transformer or there are many adjacent lines connected to the remote end
of the adjacent line, the coordination should be changed accordingly.

Date: 2021-02-02
[21L3.ZG.Z_Set]=K1×(ZL+KZmin×Zdz2)
Zdz2 is the setting [21L2.ZG.Z_Set] in the adjacent line.
It should be noted that, if ZL2 is the line impedance of the adjacent line, then the setting should be
greater than 1.2×(ZL+ KZmax×ZL2) to make sure adequate sensitivity is acheived. If it is not satisfied
based on above setting rule, then zone3 of the protected line should coordinate with zone3 of the
adjacent line, in both impedance setting and time delay setting.
➢ For Zone 4~Zone 6
The setting should be set as requirement. 3

14. 21L*.ZG.Z_Offset
It is used to set shift impedance setting of zone * of phase-to-ground distance element (*=2~6)
It is common offset impedance setting of phase-to-ground distance element (Mho and Quad
characteristics)
It is associated with the setting [21L*.DirMode]. It is valid when the direction setting [21L*.DirMode]
is set as "Non-directional". Because Zone1 is internally fixed in forward direction, this setting is
avalaible for Zone2~Zone6.
Please set this setting according to the application condition.
15. 21L*.ZG.R_Set
It is used to set resistance setting of zone * of quadrilateral phase-to-ground distance element.

(*=1~6)
If this setting is too large compared with [21L*.ZG.Z_Set], then overreach is likely to happen. Thus,
the recommended setting principle is:
[21L*.ZG.R_Set]≤4×[21L*.ZG.Z_Set]
16. 21L*.ZG.R_Offset
It is used to set shift resistance setting of zone * of phase-to-ground distance element. (Quad
characteristics, *=1~6)
There are two main usages for this setting.
⚫ For the Quad characteristic distance protection with direction, it is used to cut off the
unwanted area in second quadrant.
⚫ For the Quad characteristic distance protection without direction, it is used for the offset
boundary of the operation area.

Date: 2021-02-02
17. 21L*.ZG.phi_Shift
It is used to set phase shift of zone * of phase-to-ground distance element. (Mho characteristics,
*=1~6)
In order to improve the performance against high resistance fault, phase shift is applied to
polarized voltage in phase-to-ground distance element and phase-to-phase distance element.
Its recommended value is as follows:
⚫ Line length is smaller than 10km: 15°~30°
⚫ Line length is not smaller than 10km and smaller than 40km: 0°~15°
3 ⚫ Line length is not smaller than 40km: 0°
18. 21L*.ZG.t_Op
It is used to set time delay of zone * of phase-to-ground distance element (*=1~6)
It is common time delay setting of phase-to-ground distance protection. (Mho and Quad
characteristics)
➢ For Zone 1
Usually, it should be set as 0.
➢ For Zone 2
When phase-to-ground distance element of zone 2 coordinates with phase-to-ground distance

element of zone 1 of the adjacent line, the recommended setting principle is:
[21L2.ZG.t_Op]=Δt
Otherwise, this setting shall coordinate with the time delay of phase-to-ground distance element of
zone 2 in the adjacent line, and the recommended setting principle is:
[21L2.ZG.t_Op]=t2+Δt
Where:
t2 is the time delay of zone 2 of phase-to-ground distance element in adjacent line.
Δt is extra time delay and usually takes 0.3~0.5s
Time delay of zone 2 of phase-to-ground distance element usually take

1.0s. In the situation that fast protection for whole line is disabled while the
transmission line is still in service, time delay can be shorten to 0.3s.
➢ For Zone 3
When phase-to-ground distance element of zone 3 coordinates with phase-to-ground distance

element of zone 2 of the adjacent line, the recommended setting principle is:

Date: 2021-02-02
Otherwise, this setting shall coordinate with the time delay of phase-to-ground distance element of
zone 3 in the adjacent line, and the recommended setting principle is:
Where:
t3 is the time delay of phase-to-ground distance element of zone 3 in adjacent line.
3
3s~3.5s, and the requirement of time-delay operation must be confirmed by
the user.
The time delay setting of Zone4~Zone6 should be set as requirement.
19. 21L*.ZG.t_ShortDly
It is used to set short time delay of zone * of phase-to-ground distance element (*=2~6)
It is common short time delay of phase-to-ground distance element. (Mho and Quad
characteristics)
Under some situation, distance protection with normal time delay should operate with a shorter
time delay. For example, main protection is lost on the downstream line and distance protection on
local line should be accelerated to operate.
20. 21L*.ZG.En
It is used to enable/disable zone * of phase-to-ground distance element. (Mho or Quad

21. 21L*.ZG.En_BlkAR
It is used to enable/disable zone * of phase-to-ground distance element operating to block AR.

(Mho or Quad characteristics, *=1~6)
AR will be blocked when phase-to-ground distance element operates if the setting is set as
"Enabled".
22. 21L*.ZG.En_3I0
It is used to enable/disable zone * of phase-to-ground distance element controlled by residual

current fault detector element. (Mho or Quad characteristics, *=1~6)

Date: 2021-02-02
Phase-to-ground distance element will be controlled by the signal "FD.ROC_Pkp" if the setting is
set as "Enabled".
This setting is recommended to be set as "Enabled".
23. 21L*ZG.En_NeuDir_Blk
It is used to enable/disable zone * of phase-to-ground distance element blocked by direction

control element of earth fault protection. (Mho or Quad characteristics, i=1~6)
When the setting is set as "Enabled", these settings [50/51G.DIR.RCA],

3 [50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd], [50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd], [50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Rev],
[50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Rev], [50/51G.DIR.3I0_Min] and [50/51G.DIR.3U0_Min] should be set
correctly according the actual situation.
24. 21L*.ZG.En_NegDir_Blk
It is used to enable/disable zone * of phase-to-ground distance element blocked by direction

control element of negative-sequence overcurrent protection. (Mho or Quad characteristics,
*=1~6)
When the setting is set as "Enabled", these settings [50/51Q.DIR.RCA],

[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd], [50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd], [50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Rev],
[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Rev], [50/51Q.DIR.I2_Min] and [50/51Q.DIR.U2_Min] should be set
25. 21L*.ZP.RCA
It is used to set downward offset angle of the reactance line for zone * of quadrilateral
phase-to-phase distance element. (*=1~6).
The setting is used to prevent phase-to-phase distance element from overreaching during the fault
with resistance. The setting is associated with the setting [21L*.En_ReacLine]. And its value is
valid when the setting [21L*.En_ReacLine] is set as "Enabled".
phase-to-phase fault.
26. 21L*.ZP.Z_Set
It is used to set impedance setting of zone * of phase-to-phase distance element (*=1~6)
It is common impedance setting of phase-to-phase distance element. (Mho and Quad

characteristics)
➢ For Zone 1
Zone1 is expected to protect the most part of the line. The recommended setting principle is:

Date: 2021-02-02
[21L1. ZG. ZSet ] = Krel × Z1L
Krel is the coefficient, normally 70%~85% is used.
Z1𝐿 is the positive-sequence line impedance.
Where overhead lines are connected in parallel or run in close proximity for the whole or part of
their length, mutual coupling exists between the two circuits. For the case where one circuit of a
parallel line is out of service and earthed at both ends, an earth fault on the remote busbar may
result in mal-operation of zone 1 phase-to-phase element. In this case, it is recommended to
reduce the setting. Krel is recommended to be set as 0.7 or less. It should avoid mal-operation
when a fault occurs on the remote busbar of line.
➢ For Zone 2
3
The setting should be sensitive enough to the earth fault on the remote end of the protected line,
and coordinates with the setting of zone 1 of the adjacent line. For more complex power system,
for instance, If there is a transformer or there are many adjacent lines connected to the remote bus,
the coordination should be changed accordingly.
[21L2.ZP.Z_Set]=K1×(ZL +KZ×Zdz1)
ZL is positive-sequence impedance of the protected line.
Zdz1 is the setting [21L1.ZP.Z_Set] in the adjacent line.
KZmin is the minimum infeed coefficient under all the conditions.
K1 is the coeffiecient, 0.7~0.8 is recommended.
In the above equation, KZ follows the equation.
KZ = Iadj/Iloc
Iadj is positive-sequence current on the adjacent line when a fault happens on the adjacent line.
Iloc is positive-sequence current on the protected line when a fault happens on the adjacent line.
It should be noted that, the setting should be greater than 1.2×ZL to make sure adequate
sensitivity is acheived. If it is not satisfied based on above setting rule, then zone2 of the protected
line should coordinate with zone2 of the adjacent line, in both impedance setting and time delay
setting.
For parallel circuit, the setting tends to underreach due to mutual coupling. Therefore, it is
recommended to increase the setting.
➢ For Zone 3
Zone3 is both the backup for the protected line and the remote back for the adjacent line. Thus, it
should coordinate with the setting of zone 2 of the adjacent line. For more complex power system,
for instance, If there is a transformer or there are many adjacent lines connected to the remote end
of the adjacent line, the coordination should be changed accordingly.

Date: 2021-02-02
[21L3.ZP.Z_Set]=K1×(ZL +KZmin×Zdz2)
Zdz2 is [21L2.ZP.Z_Set] in the adjacent line.
It should be noted that, if ZL2 is the line impedance of the adjacent line, then the setting should be
greater than 1.2×(ZL+ KZmax×ZL2) to make sure adequate sensitivity is acheived. If it is not satisfied
based on above setting rule, then zone3 of the protected line should coordinate with zone3 of the
adjacent line, in both impedance setting and time delay setting.
3 The setting should be set as requirement.
27. 21L*.ZP.Z_Offset
It is used to set shift impedance setting of zone * of phase-to-phase distance element. (Mho or
Quad characteristics, *=2~6)
It is associated with the setting [21L*.DirMode]. It is valid when the direction setting [21L*.DirMode]
is set as "Non-directional". Because Zone1 is internally fixed in forward direction, this setting is
avalaible for Zone2~Zone6.
28. 21L*.ZP.R_Set
It is used to set resistance setting of zone * of quadrilateral phase-to-phase distance element.

(*=1~6)
If this setting is too large compared with [21L*.ZP.Z_Set], then overreach is likely to happen. Thus,
the recommended setting principle is:
[21L*.ZP.R_Set]≤4×[21L*.ZP.Z_Set]
29. 21L*.ZP.R_Offset
It is used to set shift resistance setting of zone * of quadrilateral phase-to-phase distance element.
( *=1~6)
There are two main usages for this setting.
⚫ For the Quad characteristic distance protection with direction, it is used to cut off the
unwanted area in second quadrant.
⚫ For the Quad characteristic distance protection without direction, it is used for the offset
boundary of the operation area.
30. 21L*.ZP.phi_Shift
It is used to set phase shift of zone * of Mho phase-to-phase distance element. (*=1~6)

Date: 2021-02-02
In order to improve the performance against high resistance fault, phase shift is applied to
polarized voltage in phase-to-phase distance element and phase-to-phase distance element.
Its recommended value is as follows:
⚫ Line length is smaller than 10km: 15°~30°
⚫ Line length is not smaller than 10km and smaller than 40km: 0°~15°
⚫ Line length is not smaller than 40km: 0°
31. 21L*.ZP.t_Op
It is used to set time delay of zone * of phase-to-phase distance element. (*=1~6)

3
It is common time delay setting of phase-to-phase distance element. (Mho and Quad
characteristics)
➢ For Zone 1
Usually, it should be set as 0.
➢ For Zone 2
When phase-to-phase distance element of zone 2 coordinates with phase-to-phase distance

element of zone 1 of the adjacent line, the setting rule is as follows:
[21L2.ZG.t_Op]=Δt
Otherwise, this setting shall coordinate with the time delay of phase-to- phase distance element of
zone 2 in the adjacent line, and the setting rule is as follows:
[21L2.ZG.t_Op] = t2+Δt
Where:
t2 is the time delay of phase-to- phase distance element of zone 2 in adjacent line.
Time delay of zone 2 of phase-to-phase distance element usually take 1.0s.

In the situation that fast protection for whole line is disabled while the
transmission line is still in service, time delay can be shorten to 0.3s.
➢ For Zone 3
When phase-to-phase distance element of zone 3 coordinates with phase-to-phase distance

element of zone 2 of the adjacent line, the setting rule is as follows:
Otherwise, this setting shall coordinate with the time delay of phase-to-phase distance element of
zone 3 in the adjacent line, and the setting rule is as follows:

Date: 2021-02-02
Where:
t3 is the time delay of phase-to-phase distance element of zone 3 in adjacent line.

3s~3.5s, and the requirement of time-delay operation must be confirmed by
3 the user.
The time delay setting of Zone 4~Zone 6 should be set as requirement.
32. 21L*.ZP.t_ShortDly
It is used to set short time delay of zone * of phase-to-phase distance element (Mho or Quad
characteristics,*=2~6)
Under some situation, distance protection with normal time delay should operate with a shorter
time delay. For example, main protection is lost on the downstream line and distance protection on
local line should be accelerated to operate.
No setting rule is recommended for this setting. Please set this setting according to the application
condition.
33. 21L*.ZP.En
It is used to enable/disable zone * of phase-to-phase distance element. (Mho or Quad

34. 21L*.ZP.En_BlkAR
It is used to enable/disable zone * of phase-to-phase distance element operating to block AR.

(Mho or Quad characteristics, *=1~6)
AR will be blocked when phase-to-phase distance element operates if the setting is set as
"Enabled".
35. 21L*.ZP.En_NegDir_Blk
It is used to enable/disable zone * of phase-to-phase distance element blocked by direction control

element of negative-sequence overcurrent protection. (Mho or Quad characteristics, *=1~6)


Date: 2021-02-02
36. 21L*.En_ShortDly
It is used to enable/disable fixed accelerate zone * of distance protection. (Mho or Quad

Normally, Zone 1 is used as instant distance protection, so this setting is only used for Zone
2~Zone 6.
37. 21L*.LoadEnch.En
It is used to enable/disable load trapezoid characteristics for zone * of distance protection. (Mho or
Quad characteristics, *=1~6) 3
38. 21L*.En_PSBR
It is used to enable/disable zone * of distance protection controlled by PSBR. (Mho or Quad

When the setting is set as "Enabled", the power swing blocking for distance protction will be
released if corresponding conditions are satisfied.
39. 21L*.En_ReacLine
It is used to enable/disable zone * of distance protection controlled by the reactance line. (Mho or
Quad characteristics, *=1~6)
The relevant settings are [21L*.ZG.RCA] and [21L*.ZP.RCA].
40. 21L.PilotFwd.Real_K0
It is used to set real component of zero-sequence compensation coefficient for forward pilot
distance zone.
𝑍̇0𝐿 − 𝑍̇1𝐿
[21𝐿. 𝑃𝑖𝑙𝑜𝑡𝐹𝑤𝑑. 𝑅𝑒𝑎𝑙_𝐾0] = 𝑅𝑒𝑎𝑙 { }
3𝑍̇1𝐿
41. 21L.PilotFwd.Imag_K0
It is used to set imaginary component of zero-sequence compensation coefficient for forward pilot
distance zone.
𝑍̇0𝐿 − 𝑍̇1𝐿
[21𝐿. 𝑃𝑖𝑙𝑜𝑡𝐹𝑤𝑑. 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑔_𝐾0] = 𝑅𝑒𝑎𝑙 { }
3𝑍̇1𝐿

Date: 2021-02-02
42. 21L.PilotFwd.phi1_Reach
It is used to set phase angle of positive-sequence impedance for forward pilot distance zone.
It should be calculated based on the line parameters.
𝑋1
[21𝐿. 𝑃𝑖𝑙𝑜𝑡𝐹𝑤𝑑. 𝑝ℎ𝑖1_𝑅𝑒𝑎𝑐ℎ] = 𝑡𝑎𝑛−1 ( )
𝑅1
X1 and R1 are positive sequence reactance and resistance of the line respectively
3 43. 21L.PilotFwd.ZG.RCA
It is used to set downward offset angle of the reactance line for quadrilateral forward
phase-to-ground pilot distance element.
The setting is used to prevent phase-to-ground distance element from overreaching during the
fault with resistance. The setting is associated with the setting [21L.PilotFwd.En_ReacLine]. And
its value is valid when the setting [21L.PilotFwd.En_ReacLine] is set as "Enabled".
44. 21L.PilotFwd.ZG.Z_Set
It is used to set impedance setting of forward pilot distance zone. (Mho or Quad characteristics,
phase-to-ground)
This setting shall be sensitive enough to the fault in the remote end of the protected line. For lines
longer than 60km, it is usually set 1.3~1.5 times the impedance of whole line, for shorter lines,
1.5~2.0 times the impedance of whole line is recommended.
For parallel lines, phase-to-ground zone element of pilot distance protection will tend to
underreach due to mutual coupling. Therefore, it is recommended to increase the setting.
45. 21L.PilotFwd.ZG.R_Set
It is used to set resistance setting of quadrilateral forward phase-to-ground pilot distance element.
If this setting is too large compared with [21L.PilotFwd.ZG.Z_Set], then overreach is likely to
happen. Thus, the recommended setting principle is:
[21L.PilotFwd.ZG.R_Set]≤4×[21L.PilotFwd.ZG.Z_Set]
46. 21L.PilotFwd.ZG.R_Offset
It is used to set shift resistance setting of quadrilateral forward phase-to-ground pilot distance
element.
It is used to cut off the unwanted area in second quadrant.

Date: 2021-02-02
47. 21L.PilotFwd.ZG.En_3I0
It is used to enable/disable forward pilot distance zone controlled by residual current fault detector
element. (Mho or Quad characteristics, phase-to-ground)
Forward pilot distance zone (phase-to-ground) will be controlled by the signal "FD.ROC_Pkp" if
the setting is set as "Enabled".
48. 21L.PilotFwd.ZG.En_NeuDir_Blk
It is used to enable/disable forward pilot phase-to-ground distance element blocked by direction

control element of earth fault protection. (Mho or Quad characteristics)
This setting is recommended to be set as "Enabled". 3

When the setting is set as "Enabled", these settings [50/51G.DIR.RCA],
[50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd], [50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd], [50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Rev],
[50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Rev], [50/51G.DIR.3I0_Min] and [50/51G.DIR.3U0_Min] should be set
49. 21L.PilotFwd.ZG.En_NegDir_Blk
It is used to enable/disable forward phase-to-ground pilot distance element blocked by direction

control element of negative-sequence overcurrent protection. (Mho or Quad characteristics)

50. 21L.PilotFwd.ZP.RCA
It is used to set downward offset angle of the reactance line for quadrilateral forward
phase-to-phase pilot distance element.
The setting is used to prevent phase-to-phase distance element from overreaching during the fault
with resistance. The setting is associated with the setting [21L.PilotFwd.En_ReacLine]. And its
value is valid when the setting [21L.PilotFwd.En_ReacLine] is set as "Enabled".
phase-to-phase fault.
51. 21L.PilotFwd.ZP.Z_Set
It is used to set impedance setting of forward phase-to-phase pilot distance element. (Mho or
Quad characteristics)
This setting shall be sensitive enough to the fault in the remote end of the protected line. For lines
longer than 60km, it is usually set 1.3~1.5 times the impedance of whole line, for shorter lines,

Date: 2021-02-02
1.5~2.0 times the impedance of whole line is recommended.
For parallel lines, phase-to-phase zone element of pilot distance protection will tend to underreach
due to mutual coupling. Therefore, it is recommended to increase the setting.
52. 21L.PilotFwd.ZP.R_Set
It is used to set resistance setting of quadrilateral forward phase-to-phase pilot distance element.
If this setting is too large compared with [21L.PilotFwd.ZP.Z_Set], then overreach is likely to
[21L.PilotFwd.ZP.R_Set]≤4×[21L.PilotFwd.ZP.Z_Set]
3 53. 21L.PilotFwd.ZP.R_Offset
It is used to set shift resistance setting of quadrilateral forward phase-to-phase pilot distance
element.
It is used to cut off the unwanted area in second quadrant.
54. 21L.PilotFwd.ZP.En_NegDir_Blk
It is used to enable/disable reverse phase-to-phase pilot distance element blocked by direction

control element of negative-sequence overcurrent protection. (Mho or Quad characteristics)

55. 21L.PilotFwd.LoadEnch.En
It is used to enable/disable load trapezoid characteristics for forward pilot distance zone. (Mho or
56. 21L.PilotFwd.En_PSBR
It is used to enable/disable forward pilot distance zone controlled by PSBR. (Mho or Quad
characteristics)
When the setting is set as "Enabled", the power swing blocking for forward pilot distance zone will
be released if corresponding conditions are satisfied.
57. 21L.PilotFwd.En_ReacLine
It is used to enable/disable forward pilot distance zone controlled by the reactance line. (Mho or
The relevant settings are [21L.PilotFwd.ZG.RCA] and [21L.PilotFwd.ZP.RCA].
58. 21L.PilotRev.Real_K0
It is used to set real component of zero-sequence compensation coefficient for reverse pilot
distance zone.

Date: 2021-02-02
𝑍̇0𝐿 − 𝑍̇1𝐿
[21𝐿. 𝑃𝑖𝑙𝑜𝑡𝑅𝑒𝑣. 𝑅𝑒𝑎𝑙_𝐾0] = 𝑅𝑒𝑎𝑙 { }
3𝑍̇1𝐿
Where:
59. 21L.PilotRev.Imag_K0
It is used to set imaginary component of zero-sequence compensation coefficient for reverse pilot
distance zone.

3
𝑍̇0𝐿 − 𝑍̇1𝐿
[21𝐿. 𝑃𝑖𝑙𝑜𝑡𝑅𝑒𝑣. 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑔_𝐾0] = 𝑅𝑒𝑎𝑙 { }
3𝑍̇1𝐿
Where:
60. 21L.PilotRev.phi1_Reach
It is used to set phase angle of positive-sequence impedance for reverse pilot distance zone.
It should be calculated based on the line parameters.
𝑋1
[21𝐿. 𝑃𝑖𝑙𝑜𝑡𝑅𝑒𝑣. 𝑝ℎ𝑖1_𝑅𝑒𝑎𝑐ℎ] = 𝑡𝑎𝑛−1 ( )
𝑅1
Where:
X1 and R1 are positive sequence reactance and resistance of the line respectively
61. 21L.PilotRev.ZG.RCA
It is used to set downward offset angle of the reactance line for reverse pilot distance zone.
(phase-to-ground)
It is used to prevent reverse pilot distance zone (phase-to-ground) from overreaching during the
fault with resistance. The setting is associated with the setting [21L.PilotRev.En_ReacLine]. And it
is valid only if the setting [21L.PilotRev.En_ReacLine] is set as "Enabled".
62. 21L.PilotRev.ZG.Z_Set
It is used to set impedance setting of reverse pilot distance zone. (Mho or Quad characteristics,
phase-to-ground)

Date: 2021-02-02
Under weak power source condition, when an internal fault occurs, the device at weak power
source end could not detect the fault, then pilot distance protection could not operate for internal
fault. The problem is eliminated by the weak infeed logic based on the impedance setting of pilot
distance protection in reverse direction. Shown as following figure, if permissive signal from
remote side is received by weak infeed end, while the pilot reverse zone doesn’t start, then it is
confirmed as internal fault.
21L.PilotFwd.ZG.Z_Set
ZL
21L.PilotRev.ZG.Z_Rev
3 EM M A Fault B N EN
21L.PilotRev.ZG.Z_Rev
21L.PilotFwd.ZG.Z_Set
The protection area of reverse pilot distance element should overlap the protection area of the
fowward pilot distance element in reverse direction. Thus, the recommended setting principle is:
[21L.PilotRev.ZG.Z_Set] (local end)=k×{[21L.PilotFwd.ZG.Z_Set] (remote end)-ZL}
Where:
k is reliability coefficient, recommended value is 1.3~1.5.
ZL is the impedance of the protected line.
63. 21L.PilotRev.ZG.R_Set
It is used to set resistance setting of quadrilateral reverse phase-to-phase pilot distance element.
If this setting is too large compared with [21L.PilotRev.ZG.Z_Set], then overreach is likely to
[21L.PilotRev.ZG.R_Set]≤4×[21L.PilotRev.ZP.G_Set]
64. 21L.PilotRev.ZG.R_Offset
It is used to set shift resistance setting of quadrilateral reverse phase-to-ground pilot distance
zone.
It is used to cut off the unwanted area in fourth quadrant.
65. 21L.PilotRev.ZG.En_3I0
It is used to enable/disable reverse pilot distance zone controlled by residual current fault detector
element. (phase-to-ground)
Reverse pilot distance zone (phase-to-ground) will be controlled by the signal "FD.ROC_Pkp" if
the setting is set as "Enabled".

Date: 2021-02-02
66. 21L.PilotRev.ZP.RCA
It is used to set downward offset angle of the reactance line for reverse phase-to-phase pilot
distance element.
It is used to prevent reverse phase-to-ground pilot distance element from overreaching during the
fault with resistance. The setting is associated with the setting [21L.PilotRev.En_ReacLine]. And it
is valid only if the setting [21L.PilotRev.En_ReacLine] is set as "Enabled".

3
67. 21L.PilotRev.ZP.Z_Set
It is used to set impedance setting of reverse pilot distance zone. (phase-to-phase)
Under weak power source condition, when an internal fault occurs, the device at weak power
source end could not detect the fault, then pilot distance protection could not operate for internal
fault. The problem is eliminated by the weak infeed logic based on the impedance setting of pilot
distance protection in reverse direction. Shown as following figure, if permissive signal from
remote side is received by weak infeed end, while the pilot reverse zone doesn′t start, then it is
confirmed as internal fault.
21L.PilotFwd.ZP.Z_Set
ZL
21L.PilotRev.ZP.Z_Rev
EM M A Fault B N EN
21L.PilotRev.ZP.Z_Rev
21L.PilotFwd.ZP.Z_Set
The protection area of reverse pilot distance element should overlap the protection area of the
fowward pilot distance element in reverse direction. Thus, the recommended setting principle is:
[21L.PilotRev.ZG.Z_Set] (local end)=k×{[21L.PilotFwd.ZG.Z_Set] (remote end)-ZL}.
Where:
k is reliability coefficient, recommended value is 1.3~1.5.
ZL is the impedance of the protected line.
68. 21L.PilotRev.ZP.R_Set
It is used to set resistance setting of quadrilateral reverse phase-to-phase pilot distance element.
If this setting is too large compared with [21L.PilotRev.ZP.Z_Set], then overreach is likely to

Date: 2021-02-02
[21L.PilotRev.ZP.R_Set]≤4×[21L.PilotRev.ZP.Z_Set]
69. 21L.PilotRev.ZP.R_Offset
It is used to set shift resistance setting of quadrilateral reverse phase-to-phase pilot distance zone.
It is used to cut off the unwanted area in fourth quadrant.
70. 21L.PilotRev.LoadEnch.En
It is used to enable/disable load trapezoid characteristics for reverse pilot distance zone.
71. 21L.PilotRev.En_PSBR
3 It is used to enable/disable reverse pilot distance zone controlled by PSBR.
When the setting is set as "Enabled", the power swing blocking for reverse pilot distance zone will
be released if corresponding conditions are satisfied.
72. 21L.PilotRev.En_ReacLine
It is used to enable/disable reverse pilot distance zone controlled by the reactance line.
The relevant settings are [21L.PilotRev.ZG.RCA] and [21L.PilotRev.ZP.RCA]
3.9 Out-of-step Protection (78)
3.9.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsOOS Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsOOS Settings
3.9.2 Setting List

Table 3.9-1 Out-of-step protection settings
Disabled
78.En
Enabled
Disabled
78.En_Trp
Enabled
78.Z_Fwd (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
78.Z_Rev (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

Date: 2021-02-02
78.phi1_Reach 30~89 1 °
78.phi_Start 0~180 1 °
78.phi_Trp 0~180 1 °
78.N_Limit 1~20 1
1. 78.En
3
It is used to enable/disable out-of-step protection.
2. 78.En_Trp
It is used to enable/disable out-of-step protection operate to trip. Out-of-step protection operates to

issue tripping command only if the setting is set as "Enabled".
3. 78.Z_Fwd
It is used to set the forward impedance setting of zone detector element.
4. 78.Z_Rev
It is used to set the reversal impedance setting of zone detector element.
In order to locate the distance between the oscillation center and where the device is equipped,
setting impedance measurement element is used to confirm the operation range of separation
device, the operation characteristic of zone relay is based on impedance discrimination.
Out-of-step protection will operate when both zone relay and out-of-step relay operate.
ZM ZLine ZN
EM 52 52 EN
I U
IED
ZRev ZFwd
Where:
ZM and ZN are respective system impedances at M side and N side.
ZFwd is the impedance from zone relay location to side-N system, i.e., [78.Z_Fwd]
ZRev is the impedance from zone relay location to side-M system, i.e., [78.Z_Rev]

Date: 2021-02-02
5. 78.phi1_Reach
It is used to set the system impedance angle for the zone detector.
The impedance angle is calculated based on the line parameters. The equation is as bellow.
𝑋1
[78. 𝑝ℎ𝑖1_𝑅𝑒𝑎𝑐ℎ] = 𝑡𝑎𝑛−1 ( )
𝑅1
Where:
X1 and R1 are positive sequence reactance and resistance of the line respectively.
3 6. 78.phi_Start
It is used to set the minimum start angle of out-of-step condition.
It generally should be greater than maximum load angle.
7. 78.phi_Trp
It is used to set the maximum tripping angle after out-of-step protection operating, which is used to
prevent the circuit breaker from incorrect operation due to too large current during tripping.
It is generally set based on the breaking capacity of circuit breaker.
8. 78.N_Limit
It is used to set the number setting of out-of-step cycle.
If the device detects the out-of-step condition and issues tripping command after the time delay
(i.e., the setting [78.N_Limit]), performing separation. The setting depends on the coordination of
the out of step relays.
Its recommended value is 1.
3.10 Distance SOTF Protection (21SOTF)
3.10.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsDist SOTF Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsSOTF Settings

Date: 2021-02-02
3.10.2 Setting List

Table 3.10-1 Distance SOTF protection Settings
SOTF.t_En 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
21SOTF.t_ManCls 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
21SOTF.t_3PAR 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
21SOTF.t_1PAR 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
3
21SOTF.En
Enabled
Disabled
21SOTF.Z2.En_ManCls
Enabled
Disabled
21SOTF.Z3.En_ManCls
Enabled
Disabled
21SOTF.Z4.En_ManCls
Enabled
Disabled
21SOTF.Z2.En_3PAR
Enabled
Disabled
21SOTF.Z3.En_3PAR
Enabled
Disabled
21SOTF.Z4.En_3PAR
Enabled
Disabled
21SOTF.Z2.En_PSBR
Enabled
Disabled
21SOTF.Z3.En_PSBR
Enabled
Disabled
21SOTF.Z4.En_PSBR
Enabled
Disabled
21SOTF.Z2.En_1PAR
Enabled

Date: 2021-02-02
21SOTF.t_PDF 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
21SOTF.En_PDF
Enabled
SOTF.U_Ddl 0.000~200.000 0.001 V
SOTF.t_Ddl 0.200~100.000 0.001 s
ManClsBI
3 CBPos
SOTF.Opt_Mode_ManCls ManClsBI/CBPos
AutoInit
All
1. SOTF.t_En
It is used to set time delay of enabling SOTF protection.
It should be more than the fixed time of closing the circuit breaker, but should not be too long. Its
recommended value is 3s.
The setting is shared by distance SOTF protection, phase current SOTF protection and residual
current SOTF protection.
2. 21SOTF.t_ManCls
It is used to set time delay of distance protection accelerating to trip when manual closing.
3. 21SOTF.t_3PAR
It is used to set time delay of distance protection accelerating to trip when 3-pole reclosing.
4. 21SOTF.t_1PAR
It is used to set time delay of distance protection accelerating to trip when 1-pole reclosing.
5. 21SOTF.En
It is used to enable/disable distance SOTF protection.
6. 21SOTF.Z2.En_ManCls
It is used to enable/disable zone 2 of distance SOTF protection for manual closing.

Date: 2021-02-02
9. 21SOTF.Z2.En_3PAR
It is used to enable/disable zone 2 of distance SOTF protection for 3-pole reclosing.
It is used to enable/disable zone 4 of distance SOTF protection for 3-pole reclosing. 3

12. 21SOTF.Z2.En_PSBR
It is used to enable/disable zone 2 controlled by PSB of distance SOTF protection for 3-pole
reclosing.
reclosing.
reclosing.
16. 21SOTF.t_PDF
It is used to set time delay of distance protection operating under pole discrepancy conditions.
This setting is the time delay for distance SOTF protection for another fault on the healthy phase
during pole discrepancy condition. The setting is recommended to set as 150ms.
When the device detects VT circuit failure, distance protection will be

disabled automatically.
17. 21SOTF.En_PDF
It is used to enable/disable distance SOTF protection under pole discrepancy conditions.
Under pole discrepancy condition after single-phase tripping, distance SOTF protection for pole
discrepancy will operate with the time delay [21SOTF.t_PDF] if another fault happens to the
healthy phase. This function is provided based on the high possibility that the late fault might be at
the same point with the previous fault, which could reduce the fault clearing time.

Date: 2021-02-02
Distance SOTF protection for pole discrepancy will operate for external
fault on healthy phase during pole discrepancy condition after a time delay
of 150ms, however the fault will be cleared in 150ms, so the possibility of
maloperation for external fault is very low. But users should evaluate
carefully.
18. SOTF.U_Ddl
It is used to set undervoltage setting of deadline detection.

3 It is used to judge the dead line.
When manual SOTF mode is set as "AutoInit", i.e., initiated by no voltage detection, distance
SOTF protection will be initiated by dead line check. When three phases currents are all smaller
than 0.04In and no fault detector element operates, SOTF logic will be enabled with the time delay
[SOTF.t_Ddl] if three phase voltages are all smaller than the setting [SOTF.U_Ddl].
Its recommend value is 0.15Un.
19. SOTF.t_Ddl
It is used to set time delay of deadline detection.
20. SOTF.Opt_Mode_ManCls
It is used to select manual SOTF mode.
The setting provides the selection for accelerated tripping mode, which can be from circuit breaker
position, external binary signal of manual closing or dead line check, the options are shown as
follows.
ManClsBI: initiated by input signal of manual closing
CBPos: initiated by CB position
ManClsBI/CBPos: initiated by either input signal of manual closing or CB position
AutoInit: initiated by no voltage detection
All: initiated by both binary input of manual closing, CB position, or initated by no voltage detection
3.11 Phase Overcurrent Protection (50/51P)
3.11.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsOC Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio

Date: 2021-02-02
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsOC Settings
3.11.2 Setting List

Table 3.11-1 Phase overcurrent protection settings
50/51P.VCE.Upp 10.000~100.000 0.001 V
50/51P.VCE.U2 2.000~57.000 0.001 V
50/51P.VCE.3U0 2.000~57.000 0.001 V
50/51P.DIR.RCA -180~179 1 °
3
50/51P.DIR.RCA_NegOC -180~179 1 °
50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd 10~90 1 °
50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd 10~90 1 °
50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Rev 10~90 1 °
50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Rev 10~90 1 °
Upp
50/51P.DIR.Opt_PolarizedVolt Up
U1
50/51P.DIR.I_Min (0.010~1.000)×In 0.001 A
50/51P.DIR.U_Min 1.000~10.000 0.001 V
Disabled
50/51P.En_VTS_Blk
Enabled
50/51P.HMB.K_Hm2 0.100~1.000 0.001
50/51P.HMB.I_Rls (2.000~30.000)×In 0.001 A
PhaseBlk
50/51P.HMB.Opt_Blk CrossBlk
MaxPhaseBlk
50/51P1.I_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
50/51P1.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
50/51P1.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
50/51P1.En_Volt_Blk Disabled

Date: 2021-02-02
Enabled
Non_Directional
50/51P1.Opt_Dir Forward
Reverse
Disabled
50/51P1.En_Hm_Blk
Enabled
3 Disabled
50/51P1.En
Enabled
Trp
50/51P1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm
ANSIE
ANSIV
ANSIN
ANSIM
ANSIDefTime
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
50/51P1.Opt_Curve
IECN
IECV
IECI
IECE
IECST
IECLT
IECDefTime
UserDefine
Inst
50/51P1.Opt_Curve_DropOut
DefTime

Date: 2021-02-02
IDMT
50/51P1.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001
50/51P1.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
50/51P1.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001
50/51P1.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001
50/51P1.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001
50/51P2.I_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

3
50/51P2.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
50/51P2.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
50/51P2.En_Volt_Blk
Enabled
Non_Directional
Reverse
Disabled
50/51P2.En_Hm_Blk
Enabled
Disabled
50/51P2.En
Enabled
Trp
50/51P2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm
ANSIE
ANSIV
ANSIN
ANSIM
50/51P2.Opt_Curve
ANSIDefTime
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT

Date: 2021-02-02
IECN
IECV
IECI
IECE
IECST
IECLT
3 IECDefTime
UserDefine
Inst
50/51P2.Opt_Curve_DropOut DefTime
IDMT
50/51P2.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001
50/51P2.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
50/51P2.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001
50/51P2.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001
50/51P2.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001
50/51P3.I_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
50/51P3.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
50/51P3.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
50/51P3.En_Volt_Blk
Enabled
Non_Directional
Reverse
Disabled
50/51P3.En_Hm_Blk
Enabled
Disabled
50/51P3.En
Enabled

Date: 2021-02-02
Trp
50/51P3.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm
ANSIE
ANSIV
ANSIN
ANSIM
ANSIDefTime
3
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
50/51P3.Opt_Curve
IECN
IECV
IECI
IECE
IECST
IECLT
IECDefTime
UserDefine
Inst
IDMT
50/51P3.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001
50/51P3.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
50/51P3.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001
50/51P3.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001
50/51P3.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001
50/51P4.I_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
50/51P4.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Date: 2021-02-02
50/51P4.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
50/51P4.En_Volt_Blk
Enabled
Non_Directional
Reverse
3 Disabled
50/51P4.En_Hm_Blk
Enabled
Disabled
50/51P4.En
Enabled
Trp
50/51P4.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm
ANSIE
ANSIV
ANSIN
ANSIM
ANSIDefTime
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
50/51P4.Opt_Curve
IECN
IECV
IECI
IECE
IECST
IECLT
IECDefTime
UserDefine

Date: 2021-02-02
Inst
IDMT
50/51P4.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001
50/51P4.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
50/51P4.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001
50/51P4.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001

3
50/51P4.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001
50/51P5.I_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
50/51P5.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
50/51P5.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
50/51P5.En_Volt_Blk
Enabled
Non_Directional
Reverse
Disabled
50/51P5.En_Hm_Blk
Enabled
Disabled
50/51P5.En
Enabled
Trp
50/51P5.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm
ANSIE
ANSIV
ANSIN
50/51P5.Opt_Curve
ANSIM
ANSIDefTime
ANSILTE

Date: 2021-02-02
ANSILTV
ANSILT
IECN
IECV
IECI
IECE
3 IECST
IECLT
IECDefTime
UserDefine
Inst
IDMT
50/51P5.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001
50/51P5.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
50/51P5.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001
50/51P5.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001
50/51P5.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001
50/51P6.I_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
50/51P6.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
50/51P6.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
50/51P6.En_Volt_Blk
Enabled
Non_Directional
Reverse
Disabled
50/51P6.En_Hm_Blk
Enabled

Date: 2021-02-02
Disabled
50/51P6.En
Enabled
Trp
50/51P6.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm
ANSIE
ANSIV
ANSIN
3
ANSIM
ANSIDefTime
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
50/51P6.Opt_Curve
IECN
IECV
IECI
IECE
IECST
IECLT
IECDefTime
UserDefine
Inst
IDMT
50/51P6.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001
50/51P6.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
50/51P6.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001
50/51P6.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001
50/51P6.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001

Date: 2021-02-02
Phase overcurrent protection is provided with six stages, each stage has independent current
setting, time delay and control logic. Generally, stage 1 of phase overcurrent protection requires
instantaneously operating, and the protected range shall not be less than 20% of the total line.
Stage 2 of phase overcurrent protection shall protect the whole line. Stage 3 and stage 4 of phase
overcurrent protection can be backup protection for the line, and also can be remote backup
protection for the adjacent line.
1. 50/51P.VCE.Upp
It is used to set low voltage setting of voltage control element.

3
The setting should be set according to the phase-to-phase voltage; which can be based on the
following equation.
𝑈𝑚𝑖𝑛
[50/51𝑃. 𝑉𝐶𝐸. 𝑈𝑝𝑝] =
𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙
Where:
Umin is the possible minimum phase-to-phase voltage during normal operation, which can be
normally taken as 0.9Un. (Un is secondary value of the rated phase-to-phase voltage)
Krel is reliable coefficient, 1.1~1.2.
It is recommended to set as 0.6~0.8Un.
2. 50/51P.VCE.U2
It is used to set negative-sequence voltage setting of voltage control element.
The setting should be greater than the imbalanced voltage during normal operation, the
imbalanced voltage value can be determined through actual measurement.
It is recommended to set as 0.04~0.08Un.
3. 50/51P.VCE.3U0
It is used to set zero-sequence voltage setting of voltage control element.
The setting should be larger than the maximum residual voltage during normal operation.
4. 50/51P.DIR.RCA
It is used to set the characteristic angle of direction control element.

Date: 2021-02-02
Ua
[50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]
Non-operating Ia
area
[50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Rev] Operating area in

forward direction
[50/51P.DIR.RCA]
Operating area in
reverse direction
3
[50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]
[50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Rev] Non-operating
area
By setting the characteristic angle to determine the most sensitive forward angle of phase current,
using phase current with phase polarized voltage to determine the direction of phase current in
forward direction or reverse direction. The setting defines the system impedance angle of
positive-sequence circuit.
5. 50/51P.DIR.RCA_NegOC
It is used to set the negative-sequence characteristic angle of direction control element.
By setting the characteristic angle to determine the most sensitive forward angle of
negative-sequence current, using negative-sequence current with negative-sequence voltage to
determine the direction of negative-sequence current in forward direction or reverse direction.
6. 50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd
It is used to set the minimum boundary in forward direction of phase overcurrent protection.
7. 50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd
It is used to set the maximum boundary in forward direction of phase overcurrent protection.
8. 50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Rev
It is used to set the minimum boundary in reverse direction of phase overcurrent protection.

Date: 2021-02-02
9. 50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Rev
It is used to set the maximum boundary in reverse direction of phase overcurrent protection.
10. 50/51P.DIR.Opt_PolarizedVolt
It is used to select the voltage polarization mode of direction control element for phase overcurrent
protection.
Upp: phase-to-phase voltage is used as polarized voltage
3 Up: phase-to-ground voltage is used as polarized voltage
U1: positive-sequence voltage is used as polarized
11. 50/51P.DIR.I_Min
It is used to set the minimum operating current setting of direction control element.
Its recommended value is 0.05In.
12. 50/51P.DIR.U_Min
It is used to set the minimum operating voltage setting of direction control element.
Its recommended value is 4V.
13. 50/51P.En_VTS_Blk
It is used to enable/disable phase overcurrent protection is blocked by VT circuit failure when VT

circuit supervision is enabled and VT circuit fails.
When VT circuit fails, phase overcurrent protection will be blocked if the setting is set as
"Enabled". Phase overcurrent protection is not controlled by direction control element and voltage
control element if the setting is set as "Disabled".
14. 50/51P.HMB.K_Hm2
It is used to set the coefficient of second harmonics of harmonic control element.
In order to prevent phase overcurrent protection from maloperation during the transformer
energized for transformer-in-line applicaiton, harmonic control element can be used to block phase
overcurrent protection. When the percentage of second harmonic component to fundamental
component in phase current is larger than the setting [50/51P.HMB.K_Hm2], harmonic control
element operates to block phase overcurrent protection if the setting [50/51Pi.En_Hm_Blk] is set
as "Enabled".
If second harmonic component of phase current is lower than 0.04In, then harmonic calculation is
not carried out and harmonic control element does not operate.

Date: 2021-02-02
15. 50/51P.HMB.I_Rls
It is used to set the current setting of releasing harmonic control element.
It shall be greater than possible maximum inrush current of the transformer.
It is recommended to set as 20In.
16. 50/51P.HMB.Opt_Blk
It is used to select the harmonic blocking mode.
PhaseBlk: phase blocking
CrossBlk: cross blocking 3

MaxPhaseBlk: maximum phase blocking
17. 50/51P*.I_Set
It is used to set the current setting for stage * of phase overcurrent protection. (*=1~6)
⚫ In order to guarantee selectivity, the operating range of instantaneous overcurrent protection

shall not exceed the end of protected line. The operating current of instantaneous overcurrent
protection shall be greater than the maximum short-circuit current when a fault happens at the
end of protected line.
[50/51𝑃 ∗. 𝐼_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥
Where:
Imax is the maximum three-phase short-circuit current measured at the location where the device is
installed in case of short circuit at the end of the protected line.
Krel is reliable coefficient, considering relay setting value error, short-circuit current calculation error,
as well as influence of non-periodic component on protection in short-circuit current, taking
1.2~1.3 or above.
⚫ Phase overcurrent protection with definite time delay requires protecting the whole line and
cooperating with phase overcurrent protection of adjacent line. According to the specific
condition of adjacent line protection, the setting calculation principle is as follows:
In coordination with instantaneous overcurrent protection of adjacent lines
[50/51𝑃 ∗. 𝐼_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝐾𝑏.𝑚𝑎𝑥 × 𝐼𝑂𝑝.1
Where:
Kb.max is branch coefficient of current, which is equal to the ratio of the current passing through the
device to the current passing through the faulty line during an earth fault at the end of protected
range of the coordinated stage of overcurrent protection of the line.
IOp.1 is operating current of instantaneous overcurrent protection in adjacent lines.
Krel is reliable coefficient, taking 1.1 or above.

Date: 2021-02-02
⚫ Phase overcurrent protection with definite time delay requires being used as backup
protection of the transformer equipped with transformer current differential protection, the
setting shall be set and calculated according to the following equation.
[50/51𝑃 ∗. 𝐼_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾 × 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥
Where:
Imax is the maximum three-phase short-circuit current of the local line when a fault happens to the
other sides of the transformer for phase overcurrent protection which is permitted to cover the
transformer.
3 K is the coordination coefficient, K≥1.3.
⚫ Due to the time dely of phase overcurrent protection with definite-time characteristics is longer
if the fault is closer to the power source, phase overcurrent protection with inverse-time
characteristics is used to shorten the operation time, the setting calculation principle is as
follows:
𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝐾𝑠𝑠
[50/51𝑃 ∗. 𝐼_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = × 𝐼𝐿.𝑚𝑎𝑥
𝐾𝑟𝑒
Where:
Krel is reliablity coefficient (coordination coefficient), taking 1.2.
Kre is drop-out coefficient, taking 0.9~0.95.
Kss is self-starting coefficient, determined by specific connection and load property via network.
IL.max is maximal load current through protection range.
⚫ To be used as overload alarm
It can be set as 1.1 times of the rated secondary current.
18. 50/51P*.t_Op
It is used to set the operating time delay for stage * of phase overcurrent protection. (*=1~6)
⚫ When the operating current is in coordination with instantaneous overcurrent protection of the
adjacent line, the operating time of definite-time phase overcurrent protection is:
[50/51P*.t_Op]＝t1+Δt
Where:
t1 is the fixed operating time of instantaneous overcurrent protection of the adjacent line, about
0.06~0.1s, or neglected sometimes
Δt is time difference, usually takes 0.3s.
⚫ When the operating current is in coordination with definite-time stage of phase overcurrent
protection of adjacent line, the operating time of definite-time phase overcurrent protection is:

Date: 2021-02-02
[50/51P*.t_Op]＝t2+Δt
Where:
t2 is the fixed operating time of the coordinated stage of phase overcurrent protection of adjacent
line.
Δt is time difference, usually takes 0.3s.
19. 50/51P*.t_DropOut
It is used to set the dropout time delay for stage * of phase overcurrent protection. (*=1~6)
This setting is valid only when definite-time dropout characteristic is selected.

3
The definite-time dropout characteristic can refer to corresponding section in "Technical Manual".
20. 50/51P*.En_Volt_Blk
It is used to enable/disable stage * of phase overcurrent protection controlled by voltage control

element. (*=1~6)
21. 50/51P*.Opt_Dir
It is used to select the direction characteristic for stage * of phase overcurrent protection. (*=1~6)
Non_Directional: no direction
22. 50/51P*.En_Hm_Blk
It is used to enable/disable stage * of phase overcurrent protection controlled by harmonic control

element. (*=1~6)
23. 50/51P*.En
It is used to enable/disable stage * of phase overcurrent protection. (*=1~6)
24. 50/51P*.Opt_Trp/Alm
It is used to enable/disable stage * of phase overcurrent protection operate to trip or alarm.

(*=1~6)
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
25. 50/51P*.Opt_Curve
It is used to select the operating characteristics curve for stage * of phase overcurrent protection.
(*=1~6)
ANSIE: ANSI Extremely Inverse

Date: 2021-02-02
ANSIV: ANSI Very Inverse
ANSIN: ANSI Normal Inverse
ANSIM: ANSI Moderately Inverse
ANSIDefTime: ANSI Definite Time
ANSILTE: ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
ANSILTV: ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
ANSILT: ANSI Long Time Inverse
3 IECN: IEC Normal Inverse
IECV: IEC Very Inverse
IEC: IEC Inverse
IECE: IEC Extremely Inverse
IECST: IEC Short-time Inverse
IECLT: IEC Long-time Inverse
IECDefTime: IEC Definite Time
UserDefine: Programmable
When the setting is set as "UserDefine", the user can customize the inverse-time curve
characteristic by setting constants K, α and C.
26. 50/51P*.Opt_Curve_DropOut
It is used to select the dropout characteristics curve for stage * of phase overcurrent protection.
(*=1~6)
Inst: instantaneous dropout characteristics
DefTime: definite-time dropout characteristics
IDMT: inverse-time dropout characteristics
When the operating characteristics curve is selected as definite-time, IEC inverse-time or

user-defined inverse-time characteristics, the dropout characteristic curve can only be selected as
instantaneous dropout characteristics or definite-time dropout characteristics. The alarm signal
"Fail_Settings" will be issued and the device will be blocked if inverse-time dropout
characteristics is selected.
When the operating characteristics curve is selected as ANSI inverse-time characteristic, the
dropout characteristic curve can be selected as instantaneous dropout characteristics,
definite-time dropout characteristics and ANSI inverse-time dropout characteristics.

Date: 2021-02-02
27. 50/51P*.TMS
It is used to set time multiplier setting for stage * of inverse-time phase overcurrent protection.
(*=1~6)
This setting can be deduced according to the operating time required by inverse-time phase
overcurrent protection.
28. 50/51P*.tmin
It is used to set the minimum operating time for stage * of inverse-time phase overcurrent
protection. (*=1~6)
When inverse-time characteristic is selected, if calculated operating time is less than the setting 3
[50/51P*.tmin], then the operating time changes to the value of the setting [50/51P*.tmin]
automatically.
If it coordinates with other protections, it can be set as "tmin+Δt".
Where:
tmin is minimum operation time of other protections.
Δt is the time difference which can be taken as 0.3~0.5.
If it is used independently, its recommended value is 0.02s.
29. 50/51P*.K
It is used to set the constant "K" for stage * of customized inverse-time phase overcurrent
protection. (*=1~6)
The setting shall be set according to the expected inverse-time characteristics of phase
overcurrent protection. It is valid only if the setting [50/51P*.Opt_Curve] is set as "UserDefine".
30. 50/51P*.Alpha
It is used to set the constant "α" for stage * of customized inverse-time phase overcurrent
protection. (*=1~6)
31. 50/51P*.C
It is used to set the constant "C" for stage * of customized inverse-time phase overcurrent
protection. (*=1~6)'

Date: 2021-02-02
3.12 Phase Current SOTF Protection (50PSOTF)
3.12.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsOC SOTF Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
3 3.12.2 Setting List

Table 3.12-1 Phase current SOTF protection settings
50PSOTF.I_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
50PSOTF.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
50PSOTF.Up_Set 0~Un 0.001 V
50PSOTF.Upp_Set 0~Un 0.001 V
50PSOTF.U2_Set 0~Un 0.001 V
50PSOTF.3U0_Set 0~Un 0.001 V
50PSOTF.En_Up_UV Disabled, Enabled
50PSOTF.En_Upp_UV Disabled, Enabled
50PSOTF.En_U2_OV Disabled, Enabled
50PSOTF.En_3U0_OV Disabled, Enabled
50PSOTF.En Disabled, Enabled
50PSOTF. En_Hm2_Blk Disabled, Enabled
1. 50PSOTF.I_Set
It is used to set current setting of phase current SOTF protection.
2. 50PSOTF.t_Op
It is used to set Time delay for phase current SOTF protection.
3. 50PSOTF.Up_Set
It is used to set Voltage setting for phase undervoltage supervision logic.

Date: 2021-02-02
In order to improve the reliability, phase current SOTF protection can select phase voltage element
as auxiliary criterion.
4. 50PSOTF.Upp_Set
It is used to set Voltage setting for phase-phase undervoltage supervision logic.
In order to improve the reliability, phase current SOTF protection can select phase-phase voltage
element as auxiliary criterion.
5. 50PSOTF.U2_Set
3
It is used to set Voltage setting for negative-sequence overvoltage supervision logic.
In order to improve the reliability, phase current SOTF protection can select negative-sequence
voltage element as auxiliary criterion.
6. 50PSOTF.3U0_Set
It is used to set Voltage setting for zero-sequence overvoltage supervision logic.
In order to improve the reliability, phase current SOTF protection can select zero-sequence
voltage element as auxiliary criterion.
7. 50PSOTF.En_Up_UV
It is used to enable/disable phase undervoltage supervision logic for phase current SOTF
protection.
If the setting is set as "Disabled", the phase undervoltage criterion will not take effect.
8. 50PSOTF.En_Upp_UV
It is used to enable/disable phase-phase undervoltage supervision logic for phase current SOTF
protection.
If the setting is set as "Disabled", the phase-phase undervoltage criterion will not take effect.
9. 50PSOTF.En_U2_OV
It is used to enable/disable negative-sequence overvoltage supervision logic for phase current

SOTF protection.
If the setting is set as "Disabled", the negative-sequence overvoltage criterion will not take effect.
10. 50PSOTF.En_3U0_OV
It is used to enable/disable zero-sequence overvoltage supervision logic for phase current SOTF

Date: 2021-02-02
protection.
If the setting is set as "Disabled", the zero-sequence ovevoltage criterion will not take effect.
11. 50PSOTF.En
It is used to enable/disable phase current SOTF protection.
12. 50PSOTF. En_Hm2_Blk
It is used to enable/disable second harmonic blocking for phase overcurrent SOTF protection.
For in-line transformer application, large inrush current generated during manual closing and
3 auto-reclosing will lead to an undesired operation of phase current SOTF protection. Second
harmonic blocking can be selected by the setting [50PSOTF.En_Hm2_Blk] to prevent
maloperation due to inrush current.
3.13 Earth Fault Protection (50/51G)
3.13.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsROC Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsROC Settings
3.13.2 Setting List

Table 3.13-1 Earth fault protection settings
50/51G.DIR.RCA -180~179 1 °
50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd 10~90 1 °
50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd 10~90 1 °
50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Rev 10~90 1 °
50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Rev 10~90 1 °
50/51G.DIR.3I0_Min (0.050~1.000)×In 0.001 A
50/51G.DIR.3U0_Min 1.000~10.000 0.001 V
Disabled
50/51G.En_VTS_Blk
Enabled
50/51G.HMB.K_Hm2 0.100~1.000 0.001

Date: 2021-02-02
50/51G.HMB.I_Rls (2.000~30.000)×In 0.001 A
50/51G1.3I0_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
50/51G1.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
50/51G1.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Non_Directional
50/51G1.Opt_Dir Forward
Reverse
3
Disabled
50/51G1.En_Hm_Blk
Enabled
Disabled
50/51G1.En
Enabled
Trp
50/51G1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm
ANSIE
ANSIV
ANSIN
ANSIM
ANSIDefTime
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
50/51G1.Opt_Curve ANSILT
IECN
IECV
IECI
IECE
IECST
IECLT
IECDefTime

Date: 2021-02-02
UserDefine
Inst
50/51G1.Opt_Curve_DropOut DefTime
IDMT
50/51G1.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001
50/51G1.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

3 50/51G1.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001
50/51G1.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001
50/51G1.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001
50/51G2.3I0_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
50/51G2.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
50/51G2.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Non_Directional
Reverse
Disabled
50/51G2.En_Hm_Blk
Enabled
Disabled
50/51G2.En
Enabled
Trp
50/51G2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm
ANSIE
ANSIV
ANSIN
50/51G2.Opt_Curve ANSIM
ANSIDefTime
ANSILTE
ANSILTV

Date: 2021-02-02
ANSILT
IECN
IECV
IECI
IECE
IECST
IECLT
3
IECDefTime
UserDefine
Inst
IDMT
50/51G2.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001
50/51G2.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
50/51G2.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001
50/51G2.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001
50/51G2.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001
50/51G3.3I0_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
50/51G3.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
50/51G3.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Non_Directional
Reverse
Disabled
50/51G3.En_Hm_Blk
Enabled
Disabled
50/51G3.En
Enabled
50/51G3.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp

Date: 2021-02-02
Alm
ANSIE
ANSIV
ANSIN
ANSIM
ANSIDefTime
3 ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
50/51G3.Opt_Curve
IECN
IECV
IECI
IECE
IECST
IECLT
IECDefTime
UserDefine
Inst
IDMT
50/51G3.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001
50/51G3.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
50/51G3.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001
50/51G3.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001
50/51G3.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001
50/51G4.3I0_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
50/51G4.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
50/51G4.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Date: 2021-02-02
Non_Directional
Reverse
Disabled
50/51G4.En_Hm_Blk
Enabled
Disabled
50/51G4.En
Enabled
3
Trp
50/51G4.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm
ANSIE
ANSIV
ANSIN
ANSIM
ANSIDefTime
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
50/51G4.Opt_Curve
IECN
IECV
IECI
IECE
IECST
IECLT
IECDefTime
UserDefine
Inst
IDMT

Date: 2021-02-02
50/51G4.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001
50/51G4.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
50/51G4.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001
50/51G4.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001
50/51G4.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001
50/51G5.3I0_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

3 50/51G5.t_Op 0.000~100.0000 0.001 s
50/51G5.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Non_Directional
Reverse
Disabled
50/51G5.En_Hm_Blk
Enabled
Disabled
50/51G5.En
Enabled
Trp
50/51G5.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm
ANSIE
ANSIV
ANSIN
ANSIM
ANSIDefTime
50/51G5.Opt_Curve ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
IECN
IECV
IECI

Date: 2021-02-02
IECE
IECST
IECLT
IECDefTime
UserDefine
Inst
3
IDMT
50/51G5.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001
50/51G5.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
50/51G5.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001
50/51G5.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001
50/51G5.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001
50/51G6.3I0_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
50/51G6.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
50/51G6.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Non_Directional
Reverse
Disabled
50/51G6.En_Hm_Blk
Enabled
Disabled
50/51G6.En
Enabled
Trp
50/51G6.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm
ANSIE
50/51G6.Opt_Curve ANSIV
ANSIN

Date: 2021-02-02
ANSIM
ANSIDefTime
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
IECN
3 IECV
IECI
IECE
IECST
IECLT
IECDefTime
UserDefine
Inst
IDMT
50/51G6.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001
50/51G6.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
50/51G6.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001
50/51G6.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001
50/51G6.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001
50/51G6.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001
1. 50/51G.DIR.RCA
It is used to set the characteristic angle of direction control element.

Date: 2021-02-02
-U0
[50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]
Non-operating I0
area
Operating area in
[50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Rev] forward direction
[50/51G.DIR.RCA]
Operating area in
reverse direction
3
[50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]
Non-operating
area
[50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Rev]
By setting the characteristic angle to determine the most sensitive forward angle of zero-sequence
current, using zero-sequence current with zero-sequence voltage to determine the direction of
zero-sequence current in forward direction or reverse direction.
For line protection, when the CT polarity is on the busbar side, its recommended value is 45°.
2. 50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd
It is used to set the minimum boundary in forward direction of earth fault protection.
3. 50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd
It is used to set the maximum boundary in forward direction of earth fault protection.
4. 50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Rev
It is used to set the minimum boundary in reverse direction of earth fault protection.
5. 50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Rev
It is used to set the maximum boundary in reverse direction of earth fault protection.
6. 50/51G.DIR.I_Min
It is used to set the minimum operating current setting of direction control element.

Date: 2021-02-02
7. 50/51G.DIR.U_Min
It is used to set the minimum operating voltage setting of direction control element.
Its recommended value is 4V. Considering the sensitivity of earth fault with high resistance, the
recommended value is 0.5~2V. When it cooperates with other protection with direction control
element, it is recommended to add 0.5~1V on the basis of the similar setting of other protection.
8. 50/51G.En_VTS_Blk
It is used to enable/disable earth fault protection is blocked by VT circuit failure when VT circuit
supervision is enabled and VT circuit fails.
3 When VT circuit fails, earth fault protection will be blocked if the setting is set as "Enabled". Earth
fault protection is not controlled by direction control element if the setting is set as "Disabled".
9. 50/51G.HMB.K_Hm2
It is used to set the coefficient of second harmonics of harmonic control element.
In order to prevent earth fault protection from maloperation during the transformer energized for
transformer-in-line applicaiton, harmonic control element can be used to block earth fault
protection. When the percentage of second harmonic component to fundamental component in
phase current is larger than the setting [50/51G.HMB.K_Hm2], harmonic control element operates
to block phase overcurrent protection if the setting [50/51Gi.En_Hm_Blk] is set as "Enabled".
If second harmonic component of residual current is lower than 0.04In, then harmonic calculation
is not carried out and harmonic control element does not operate.
10. 50/51G.HMB.I_Rls
It is used to set the current setting of releasing harmonic control element.
It shall be greater than possible maximum inrush current of the transformer. It is recommended to
set as 20In.
11. 50/51G*.3I0_Set
It is used set the zero-sequence current setting for stage * of earth fault protection. (*=1~6)
1) When stage * of earth fault protection is used as fast protection, the following conditions
should be considered.
⚫ It shall be greater than the maximum residual current under pole disagreement condition.
⚫ It shall be greater than the maximum residual current when internal fault happens to the end
of the line.
Its calculation principle is:
[50/51𝐺 ∗ .3𝐼0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 3𝐼0.𝑚𝑎𝑥

Date: 2021-02-02
Where:
I0.max is the maximum zero-sequence current for the external fault.
Krel is the reliability coefficient, usually take 1.3 or above
2) When stage * of earth fault protection is used as definite-time protection, it should coordinate
with the protection of other adjacent line.
⚫ It shall be greater than the maximum residual current under pole disagreement condition.
⚫ It shall coordinate with the measurement element in the adjacent line and ensure sensitive
enough for the fault happening to the end of the line.
3
[50/51𝐺 ∗ .3𝐼0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝐾𝑏𝑟 × 𝐼0.𝐴𝑑𝑗
Where:
Krel is the reliability coefficient, usually take 1.1~1.3
Kbr is the branching coefficient of residual current, which is equal to ratio of residual current
passing through the device to passing through the faulty line during an earth fault at the end of
protected section of coordinated stage of earth fault protection of the line. Maximum value among
various operation conditions can be taken
I0.Adj is current setting of stage coordinated in the adjacent line
3) When earth fault protection is used as backup protection for ground fault of this line through
resistor and ground fault of adjacent elements, and its primary current value should not be
more than 300A. Under the condition of avoidance from the maximum unbalance current of
three-phase short circuit at other sides of the transformer at the end of this line, it is necessary
to meet the requirement that the fault at the end of the adjacent lines has sufficient sensitivity;
it is necessary to check the coordination condition with the definite-time earth fault protection
of the adjacent line, and the operating time is set according to the coordination relation.
[50/51𝐺 ∗ .3𝐼0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝐾𝑎𝑝𝑒𝑟 × 𝐾𝑠𝑡 × 𝑓𝑖 × 𝐼𝑜𝑝.1
Where:
Krel is reliability coefficient, usually taking 1.1 or above.
Kaper is a periodic component coefficient, taking as 1.5~2.0.
Kst is same type coefficient, taken as 0.5 when the transformer is of the same type.
fi is the amplitude error of transformer, generally taking as 0.1.
Iop.1 is three-phase short-circuit current at the end of local line.
4) When earth fault protection is used as inverse-time protecton, the calculation principle is
[50/51𝐺 ∗ .3𝐼0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑝 × 𝐼𝑑𝑧

Date: 2021-02-02
Where:
Kp is the coordinating coefficient, which can be taken as 1.15~1.25.
Idz is the current setting of inverse-time earth fault protection to be coordinated.
12. 50/51G*.t_Op
It is used to set the operating time delay for stage * of earth fault protection. (*=1~6)
⚫ When earth fault protection as definite-time protection coordinates with adjacent line, this
setting should be set according to coordinate with time delay of earth fault protection of the
subordinate line.
3 Its calculation principle is:
[50/51𝐺 ∗. 𝑡_𝑂𝑝] = 𝑡0.𝐴𝑑𝑗 + ∆𝑡
Where:
t0.Adj is the time delay of stage coordinated in the adjacent line.
Δt is extra time delay, usually take 0.3~0.5s
⚫ If it is used independently, it should be greater than maximum operation time of system pole
discrepancy.
13. 50/51G*.t_DropOut
It is used to set the dropout time delay for stage * of earth fault protection. (*=1~6)
The setting is valid when definite-time dropout characteristics is selected.
14. 50/51G*.Opt_Dir
It is used to select the direction characteristic for stage * of earth fault protection. (*=1~6)
15. 50/51G*.En_Hm_Blk
It is used to enable/disable stage * of earth fault protection controlled by harmonic control element.
(*=1~6)
16. 50/51G*.En
It is used to enable/disable stage * of earth fault protection. (*=1~6)
17. 50/51G*.Opt_Trp/Alm
It is used to enable/disable stage * of earth fault protection operate to trip or alarm. (*=1~6)

Date: 2021-02-02
18. 50/51G*.Opt_Curve
It is used to select the operating characteristics curve for stage * of earth fault protection. (*=1~6)
ANSIE: ANSI Extremely Inverse
ANSIDefTime: ANSI Definite Time 3

IECN: IEC Normal Inverse
IEC: IEC Inverse
19. 50/51G*.Opt_Curve_DropOut
It is used to select the dropout characteristics curve for stage * of earth fault protection. (*=1~6)


Date: 2021-02-02
20. 50/51G*.TMS
It is used to set time multiplier setting for stage * of inverse-time earth fault protection. (*=1~6)
This setting can be deduced according to the operating time required by inverse-time earth fault
protection.
21. 50/51G*.tmin
3 It is used to set the minimum operating time for stage * of inverse-time earth fault protection.
(*=1~6)
When inverse-time characteristic is selected, if calculated operating time is less than the setting
[50/51G*.tmin], then the operating time changes to the value of the setting [50/51G*.tmin]
automatically.
If it coordinates with other protections, it can be set as "tmin+Δt".
Where:
tmin is minimum operating time of other protections.
Δt is the time difference which can be taken as 0.3~0.5.
If it is used independently, its recommended value is 0.02s.
22. 50/51G*.K
It is used to set the constant “K” for stage * of customized inverse-time earth fault protection.
(*=1~6)
The setting shall be set according to the expected inverse-time characteristics of earth fault
protection. It is valid only if the setting [50/51G*.Opt_Curve] is set as "UserDefine".
23. 50/51G*.Alpha
It is used to set the constant “α” for stage * of customized inverse-time earth fault protection.
(*=1~6)
24. 50/51G*.C
It is used to set the constant “C” for stage * of customized inverse-time earth fault protection.
(*=1~6)

Date: 2021-02-02
3.14 Residual Current SOTF Protection (50GSOTF)
3.14.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsROC SOTF Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
3.14.2 Setting List 3

Table 3.14-1 Residual current SOTF protection settings
50GSOTF.3I0_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
50GSOTF.t_Op_1P 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
50GSOTF.t_Op_3P 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
50GSOTF.En
Enabled
Disabled
50GSOTF.En_Hm2_Blk
Enabled
1. 50GSOTF.3I0_Set
It is used to set current setting of residual current SOTF protection.
The setting should ensure sufficient sensitivity to ground fault with high impedance at the end of
the line.
2. 50GSOTF.t_Op_1P
It is used to set time delay for residual current SOTF protection when 1 pole closed.
3. 50GSOTF.t_Op_3P
It is used to set time delay for residual current SOTF protection when 3 pole closed.
Its recommended value is 0.1s

Date: 2021-02-02
4. 50GSOTF.En
It is used to enable/disable residual current SOTF protection.
5. 50GSOTF.En_Hm2_Blk
It is used to enable/disable residual current SOTF protection blocked by harmonic.
For in-line transformer application, large inrush current generated during manual closing and
auto-reclosing will lead to an undesired operation of residual current SOTF protection. Second
harmonic blocking can be selected by the setting [50GSOTF.En_Hm2_Blk] to prevent
maloperation due to inrush current.
3
3.15 Negative-sequence Overcurrent Protection (50/51Q)
3.15.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsNegOC Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsNegOC Settings
3.15.2 Setting List

Table 3.15-1 Negative-sequence overcurrent protection settings
50/51Q.DIR.RCA -180~179 1 °
50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd 10~90 1 °
50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd 10~90 1 °
50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Rev 10~90 1 °
50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Rev 10~90 1 °
50/51Q.DIR.I2_Min (0.050~1.000)×In 0.001 A
50/51Q.DIR.U2_Min 1.000~10.000 0.001 V
Disabled
50/51Q.En_VTS_Blk
Enabled
50/51Q1.I2_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
50/51Q1.t_Op 0.030~100.000 0.001 s
50/51Q1.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Date: 2021-02-02
Non_Directional
50/51Q1.Opt_Dir Forward
Reverse
Disabled
50/51Q1.En
Enabled
Trp
50/51Q1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm
3
ANSIE
ANSIV
ANSIN
ANSIM
ANSIDefTime
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
50/51Q1.Opt_Curve
IECN
IECV
IECI
IECE
IECST
IECLT
IECDefTime
UserDefine
Inst
50/51Q1.Opt_Curve_DropOut DefTime
IDMT
50/51Q1.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001
50/51Q1.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

Date: 2021-02-02
50/51Q1.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001
50/51Q1.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001
50/51Q1.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001
50/51Q2.I2_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
50/51Q2.t_Op 0.030~100.000 0.001 s
50/51Q2.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

3 Non_Directional
50/51Q2.Opt_Dir Forward
Reverse
Disabled
50/51Q2.En
Enabled
Trp
50/51Q2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm
ANSIE
ANSIV
ANSIN
ANSIM
ANSIDefTime
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
50/51Q2.Opt_Curve ANSILT
IECN
IECV
IECI
IECE
IECST
IECLT
IECDefTime

Date: 2021-02-02
UserDefine
Inst
50/51Q2.Opt_Curve_DropOut DefTime
IDMT
50/51Q2.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001
50/51Q2.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
50/51Q2.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001

3
50/51Q2.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001
50/51Q2.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001
1. 50/51Q.DIR.RCA
It is use to set the characteristic angle of direction control element.
-U2
[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]
Non-operating I2
area
[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Rev]
Operating area in
forward direction
[50/51Q.DIR.RCA]
Operating area in
reverse direction
[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]
Non-operating
area
[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Rev]
By setting the characteristic angle to determine the most sensitive forward angle of
negative-sequence current, using negative-sequence current with negative-sequence voltage to
determine the direction of negative-sequence current in forward direction or reverse direction.
2. 50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd
It is use to set the minimum boundary in forward direction of negative-sequence overcurrent

Date: 2021-02-02
protection.
3. 50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd
It is use to set the maximum boundary in forward direction of negative-sequence overcurrent

protection.
4. 50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Rev
3 It is use to set the minimum boundary in reverse direction of negative-sequence overcurrent

protection.
5. 50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Rev
It is use to set the maximum boundary in reverse direction of negative-sequence overcurrent

protection.
6. 50/51Q.DIR.I_Min
It is use to set the minimum operating current setting of direction control element.
7. 50/51Q.DIR.U_Min
It is use to set the minimum operating voltage setting of direction control element.
8. 50/51Q.En_VTS_Blk
It is used to enable/disable negative-sequence overcurrent protection is blocked by VT circuit

failure when VT circuit supervision is enabled and VT circuit fails.
When VT circuit fails, negative-sequence overcurrent protection will be blocked if the setting is set
as "Enabled". Negative-sequence overcurrent protection is not controlled by direction control
element if the setting is set as "Disabled".
9. 50/51Q*.I2_Set
It is used to set negative-sequence current setting for stage * of negative-sequence overcurrent

protection. (*=1 or 2)
When two-phase short circuit is happened, the following equation is satisfied.
1
𝐼2.2𝑃 = 𝐼
2 3𝑃

Date: 2021-02-02
Where:
I2.2P is the negative-sequence component of the two-phase short-circuit current.
I3P is the three-phase short-circuit current.
For line protection, only when the pickup current of negative-sequence overcurrent element is
equal to 0.5 times the pickup setting of phase overcurrent element fixedly, the relative sensitivity
coefficient of two-phase short circuit is equal to 1. During setting calculation, the coordination of
sensitivity can be carried out only according to the three-phase short circuit and the overcurrent
protection with adjacent lines.
The setting of negative-sequence overcurrent protection can be referred to the setting of phase
overcurrent protection.
3
[50/51𝑄 ∗. 𝐼2_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑛 × 𝐼𝐿.𝑚𝑎𝑥
Where:
IL.max is maximum value of three-phase short circuit current of this line.
Kn is negative-sequence coefficient, taking as 0.5.
10. 50/51Q*.t_Op
It is used to set the operating time delay for stage * of negative-sequence overcurrent protection.
(*=1 or 2)
It should be set being identical with the time delay of phase overcurrent protection. Because the
fault happens in the same point, the protection with higher sensitivity between phase overcurrent
protection and negative-sequence overcurrent protection will operate in priority.
11. 50/51Q*.t_DropOut
It is used to set the dropout time delay for stage * of negative-sequence overcurrent protection.
(*=1 or 2)
The setting is valid when definite-time dropout characteristics is selected.
12. 50/51Q*.Opt_Dir
It is used to select the direction characteristic for stage * of negative-sequence overcurrent

13. 50/51Q*.En
It is used to enable/disable stage * of negative-sequence overcurrent protection. (*=1 or 2)

Date: 2021-02-02
14. 50/51Q*.Opt_Trp/Alm
It is used to enable/disable stage * of negative-sequence overcurrent protection operate to trip or

alarm. (*=1 or 2)
15. 50/51Q*.Opt_Curve
It is used to select the operating characteristics curve for stage * of negative-sequence overcurrent
3 ANSIE: ANSI Extremely Inverse
IECN: IEC Normal Inverse
IEC: IEC Inverse
16. 50/51Q*.Opt_Curve_DropOut
It is used to select the dropout characteristics curve for stage * of negative-sequence overcurrent

Date: 2021-02-02

17. 50/51Q*.TMS 3
It is used to set time multiplier setting for stage * of inverse-time negative-sequence overcurrent
The setting can be deduced according to the operating time required by inverse-time
negative-sequence overcurrent protection.
18. 50/51Q*.tmin
It is used to set the minimum operating time for stage * of inverse-time negative-sequence
overcurrent protection. (*=1 or 2)
When inverse-time characteristic is selected, if calculated operating time is less than the setting
[50/51Q*.tmin], then the operating time changes to the value of the setting [50/51Q*.tmin]
automatically.
19. 50/51Q*.K
It is used to set the constant "K" for stage * of customized inverse-time negative-sequence
overcurrent protection (*=1 or 2)
The setting shall be set according to the expected inverse-time characteristics of

negative-sequence overcurrent protection. It is valid only if the setting [50/51Q*.Opt_Curve] is set
as "UserDefine".
20. 50/51Q*.Alpha
It is used to set the constant "α" for stage * of customized inverse-time negative-sequence

as "UserDefine".
21. 50/51Q*.C
It is used to set the constant "C" for stage * of customized inverse-time negative-sequence

Date: 2021-02-02

as "UserDefine".
3.16 Phase Overvoltage Protection (59P)
3.16.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsOV Settings

3
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsOV Settings
3.16.2 Setting List

Table 3.16-1 Phase overvoltage protection settings
Up
59P1.Opt_Up/Upp
Upp
3P
59P1.Opt_1P/3P
1P
59P1.U_Set 57.700~200.000 0.001 V
59P1.K_DropOut 0.930~1.000 0.001
59P1.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s
59P1.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
59P1.En
Enabled
Trp
59P1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm
ANSIDefTime
IECDefTime
59P1.Opt_Curve
UserDefine
InvTime_U
59P1.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst

Date: 2021-02-02
DefTime
59P1.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001
59P1.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
59P1.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001
59P1.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001
59P1.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001
Up
3
59P2.Opt_Up/Upp
Upp
3P
59P2.Opt_1P/3P
1P
59P2.U_Set 57.700~200.000 0.001 V
59P2.K_DropOut 0.930~1.000 0.001
59P2.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s
59P2.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
59P2.En
Enabled
Trp
59P2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm
ANSIDefTime
IECDefTime
59P2.Opt_Curve
UserDefine
InvTime_U
Inst
59P2.Opt_Curve_DropOut
DefTime
59P2.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001
59P2.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
59P2.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001
59P2.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001

Date: 2021-02-02
59P2.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001
1. 59P*.Opt_Up/Upp
It is used to select the calculation voltage used by stage * of phase overvoltage protection. (*=1 or
2)
Up: phase voltage

3 Upp: phase-to-phase voltage
2. 59P*.Opt_1P/3P
It is used to select the voltage criterion used by stage * of phase overvoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)
3P: 3-out-of-3 mode, i.e., phase overvoltage protection detects three-phase voltages or three
phase-to-phase voltages.
1P: 1-out-of-3 mode, i.e., phase overvoltage protection detects any phase voltage or
phase-to-phase voltage.
3. 59P*.U_Set
It is used to set the voltage setting for stage * of phase overvoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)
The setting should be set according to the actual isolation requirements of the system equipment.
and the setting [59P*.Opt_Up/Upp].
If the setting [59P*.Opt_Up/Upp] is set as "Upp", then phase-to-phase voltage will be used for
calculation, [59P*.U_Set] should be set as phase-to-phase voltage.
If the setting [59P*.Opt_Up/Upp] is set as "Up", then phase voltage will be used for calculation,
[59P*.U_Set] should be set as phase voltage.
Generally, it shall be set according to the affordability of protected equipment:
⚫ For definite-time charactertistics
[59𝑃 ∗. 𝑈_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = (1.1~1.5) × 𝑈𝑛
Un is the second rated voltage.
Application example:
If the operating criterion adopts phase-to-phase voltage, Un=110V, 1.3 times Un is assigned for
overvoltage protection. The setting will be given as below:
[59P*.Opt_Up/Upp]=Upp
[59P*.U_Set]=143V
If the operating criterion adopts phase-to-ground voltage, Un=63.5V, 1.3 times Un is assigned for

Date: 2021-02-02
overvoltage protection. The setting will be given as below:
[59P*.Opt_Up/Upp]=Up
[59P*.U_Set]=82.55V
⚫ For inverse-time characteristics
If inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting should be configured as follows.
[59𝑃 ∗. 𝑈_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝑈𝑚𝑎𝑥
Where:
Krel is the reliability coefficient of and can be 1.05~1.1. 3

Umax is the minimum voltage under which the protected equipment can operate for a long term. If
the operating criterion adopts phase-to-phase voltage, the Umax is the phase-to-phase voltage,
otherwise it is the phase-to-ground voltage.
4. 59P*.K_DropOut
It is used to set the dropout coefficient for stage * of phase overvoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)
5. 59P*.t_Op
It is used to set the operating time delay for stage * of phase overvoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)
It shall be set according to the withstanding voltage ability of protected equipment, and its
recommended value is 0.3s~1s.
6. 59P*.t_DropOut
It is used to set the dropout time delay for stage * of phase overvoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)
The setting is valid when definite-time dropout characteristics is selected, and its recommended
value is 0.
7. 59Pi.En
It is used to enable/disable stage * of phase overvoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)
8. 59P*.Opt_Trp/Alm
It is used to enable/disable stage * of phase overvoltage protection operate to trip or alarm (*=1 or
2)
9. 59P*.Opt_Curve
It is used to select the operating characteristics curve for stage * of phase overvoltage protection.
(*=1 or 2)

Date: 2021-02-02
InvTime_U: Voltage Inverse
10. 59P*.Opt_Curve_DropOut
3 It is used to set the dropout characteristics curve for stage * of phase overvoltage protection (*=1
or 2)
Inst: instantaneous dropout characteristics.
DefTime: definite-time dropout characteristics.
11. 59P*.TMS
It is used to set time multiplier setting for stage * of inverse-time phase overvoltage protection. (*=1
or 2)
The setting can be deduced according to the operating time required by inverse-time phase
overvoltage protection.
12. 59P*.tmin
It is used to set the minimum operating time for stage * of inverse-time phase overvoltage
When inverse-time characteristics is selected, if calculated operating time is less than the setting
[59P*.tmin], then the operating time changes to the setting [59P*.tmin] automatically. Its
recommended value is 0.02s.
13. 59P*.K
It is used to set the constant “K” for stage * of customized inverse-time phase overvoltage
The setting shall be set according to the expected inverse-time characteristics of pahse
overvoltage protection. It is valid only if the setting [59P*.Opt_Curve] is set as "UserDefine".
14. 59Pi.Alpha
It is used to set the constant “C” for stage * of customized inverse-time phase overvoltage

Date: 2021-02-02
15. 59Px.C
It is used to set the constant “α” for stage i of customized inverse-time phase overvoltage
protection. (i=1 or 2)
3.17 Residual Overvoltage Protection (59G)
3.17.1 Access Path

3
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsROV Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsROV Settings
3.17.2 Setting List

Table 3.17-1 Residual overvoltage protection settings
59G1.3U0_Set 1.000~200.000 0.001 V
59G1.K_DropOut 0.930~1.000 0.001
59G1.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s
59G1.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
59G1.En
Enabled
Trp
59G1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm
59G2.3U0_Set 1.000~200.000 0.001 V
59G2.K_DropOut 0.930~1.000 0.001
59G2.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s
59G2.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
59G2.En
Enabled
59G2.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp

Date: 2021-02-02
Alm
1. 59G*.3U0_Set
It is used to set the voltage setting for stage * of residual overvoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)
It shall be greater than maximum unbalanced residual voltage under normal conditions.
⚫ For indirectly earthed system

3
The residual overvoltage protection is generally used for alarm. It shall be greater than maximum
unbalanced residual voltage under normal conditions.
0.5 × 𝑈2𝑛
[59𝐺 ∗ .3𝑈0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] =
1.732
⚫ For earthed system via gap
2 × 𝑈2𝑛
[59𝐺 ∗ .3𝑈0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] =
1.732
⚫ For single-phase earth fault of unearthed system
1.2 × 𝑈2𝑛
[59𝐺 ∗ .3𝑈0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] =
1.732
U2n is VT secondary rated voltage.
2. 59G*.K_DropOut
It is used to set the dropout coefficient for stage * of residual overvoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)
3. 59G*.t_Op
It is used to set the operating time delay for stage * of residual overvoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)
It shall be set to keep residual overvotlage protection away from the influence of transient
characteristics and its recommended value is 0.3s~0.5s.
4. 59G*.t_DropOut
It is used to set the dropout time delay for stage * of residual overvoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)
Residual overvoltage protection supports instantaneous dropout characteristics and definite-time

dropout characteristics.

Date: 2021-02-02
5. 59G*.En
It is used to enable/disable stage * of residual overvoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)
6. 59G*.Opt_Trp/Alm
It is used to enable/disable stage * of residual overvoltage protection operate to trip or alarm. (*=1
or 2)
3.18 Negative-sequence Overvoltage Protection (59Q)

3
3.18.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsNegOV Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsNegOV Settings
3.18.2 Setting List

Table 3.18-1 Negative-sequence overvoltage protection settings
59Q1.U2_Set 2.000~100.000 0.001 V
59Q1.K_DropOut 0.930~1.000 0.001
59Q1.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s
59Q1.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
59Q1.En
Enabled
Trp
59Q1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm
59Q2.U2_Set 2.000~100.000 0.001 V
59Q2.K_DropOut 0.930~1.000 0.001
59Q2.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s
59Q2.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Date: 2021-02-02
Disabled
59Q2.En
Enabled
Trp
59Q2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm
3.18.3 Calcualtion Principle
1. 59Q*.U2_Set
3
It is used to set the voltage setting for stage * of negative-sequence overvoltage protection. (i=1 or
2)
The setting should be set according to negative-sequence voltage. The calculation principle is as
below.
𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝑈2𝑛
[59𝑄 ∗. 𝑈2_𝑆𝑒𝑡] =
1.732
Where:
U2n is VT secondary rated voltage.
Krel is the reliable coefficient.
Krel needs to be set according to the specific application. If the negative-sequence overvoltage
protection is used to release the relevant current protection when detecting the reverse phase
sequence connection or the asymmetric fault, the setting can be not very sensitive, and Krel is
recommended to be set as 0.1.
If the negative-sequence overvoltage protection is used to detect the unbalance of the rotating
motor and prevent the motor from overheating and burning out, Krel is recommended to be set as
0.03.
Assuming that the VT rated secondary value U2n=100V, Krel=0.1
0.1 × 100
[59𝑄 ∗. 𝑈2𝑆𝑒𝑡 ] = = 5.78𝑉
1.732
In addition, the setting should be more thant the maximum unbalance negative-sequence voltage
during normal operation.
2. 59Q*.K_DropOut
It is used to set the dropout coefficient for stage * of negative-sequence overvoltage protection.
(*=1 or 2)
The setting can be appropriately reduced to prevent frequent jitter if the negative-sequence

Date: 2021-02-02
voltage setting is too small.
3. 59Q*.t_Op
It is used to set the operating time delay for stage * of negative-sequence overvoltage protection.
(*=1 or 2)
The time delay can be appropriately reduced if the operating threshold of negative-sequence
voltage is large, for example, 1s.
If the negative-sequence voltage setting is small, it is recommended to set this setting as a larger
value, for example, 5s. 3
4. 59Q*.t_DropOut
It is used to set the dropout time delay for stage * of negative-sequence overvoltage protection.
(*=1 or 2)
Negative-sequence overvoltage protection supports instantaneous dropout characteristics and

definite-time dropout characteristics.
5. 59Q*.En
It is used to enable/disable stage * of negative-sequence overvoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)
6. 59Q*.Opt_Trp/Alm
It is used to enable/disable stage * of negative-sequence overvoltage protection operate to trip or

alarm. (i=1 or 2)
3.19 Phase Undervoltage Protection (27P)
3.19.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsUV Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsUV Settings

Date: 2021-02-02
3.19.2 Setting List

Table 3.19-1 Phase undervoltage protection settings
Up
27P1.Opt_Up/Upp
Upp
3P
27P1.Opt_1P/3P
1P
3 None
Curr
27P1.Opt_LogicMode CBPos
CurrOrCBPos
CurrAndCBPos
27P1.U_Set 5.000~120.000 0.001 V
27P1.K_DropOut 1.000~1.200 0.001
27P1.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s
27P1.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
27P1.En_VTS_Blk
Enabled
Disabled
27P1.En
Enabled
Trp
27P1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm
ANSIDefTime
IECDefTime
27P1.Opt_Curve
UserDefine
InvTime_U
Inst
27P1.Opt_Curve_DropOut
DefTime
27P1.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001

Date: 2021-02-02
27P1.tmin 0.030~10.000 0.001 s
27P1.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001
27P1.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001
27P1.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001
Up
27P2.Opt_Up/Upp
Upp
3P
3
27P2.Opt_1P/3P
1P
None
Curr
27P2.Opt_LogicMode CBPos
CurrOrCBPos
CurrAndCBPos
27P2.U_Set 5.000~120.000 0.001 V
27P2.K_DropOut 1.000~1.200 0.001
27P2.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s
27P2.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
27P2.En_VTS_Blk
Enabled
Disabled
27P2.En
Enabled
Trp
27P2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm
ANSIDefTime
IECDefTime
27P2.Opt_Curve
UserDefine
InvTime_U
27P2.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst

Date: 2021-02-02
DefTime
27P2.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001
27P2.tmin 0.030~10.000 0.001 s
27P2.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001
27P2.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001
27P2.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001

3
1. 27P*.Opt_Up/Upp
It is used to select the calculation voltage used by stage * of phase undervoltage protection. (*=1
or 2)
Up: phase voltage
Upp: phase-to-phase voltage
2. 27P*.Opt_1P/3P
It is used to select the voltage criterion used by stage * of phase undervoltage protection. (*=1 or
2)
3P: 3-out-of-3 mode, i.e., phase undervoltage protection detects three-phase voltages or three
phase-to-phase voltages.
1P: 1-out-of-3 mode, i.e., phase undervoltage protection detects any phase voltage or
phase-to-phase voltage.
3. 27P*.Opt_LogicMode
The option of auxiliary criterion mode for stage * of phase undervoltage protection (*=1 or 2)
None: no check
Curr: check current condition
CBPos: check normally open auxiliary contact
CurrOrCBPos: check current condition or normally open auxiliary contact
CurrAndCBPos: check current condition and normally open auxiliary contact
When the load current is relatively fixed and is larger than 0.04In, the current criterion is
recommended, such as the capacitor and reactor load. Otherwise, the breaker position criterion is
recommended.
When the breaker position can be acquired, and the load current is also larger than 0.04In,

Date: 2021-02-02
comprehensive criterion can also be used.
When the circuit breaker of the incoming line has been tripped and the busbar loses voltage,
phase undervoltage protection is still desired to operate at this time, so the breaker position
criterion needs to be selected.
4. 27P*.U_Set
It is used to set the voltage setting for stage * of phase undervoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)
The setting should be set according to the actual stability level of power system, but it should
ensure sensitive enough to the fault at the end of the line and not be greater than the minimum
operation voltage under normal conditions.
3
The setting should also be set according to the setting [27P*.Opt_Up/Upp].
If the setting [27P*.Opt_Up/Upp] is set as "Upp", then phase-to-phase voltage will be used for
calculation, [27P*.U_Set] should be set as phase-to-phase voltage.
If the setting [27Pi.Opt_Up/Upp] is set as "Up", then phase voltage will be used for calculation,
[27P*.U_Set] should be set as phase voltage.
If the operating criterion adopts phase-to-phase voltage, Un=110V, 0.7 times Un is assigned for
undervoltage protection. The setting will be given as below:
[27P*.Opt_Up/Upp]=Upp
[27P*.U_Set]=77V
If the operating criterion adopts phase-to-ground voltage, Un=63.5V, 0.7 times Un is assigned for
undervoltage protection. The setting will be given as below:
[27P*.Opt_Up/Upp]=Up
[27P*.U_Set]=44.45V
5. 27P*.K_DropOut
It is used to set the dropout coefficient for stage * of phase undervoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)
6. 27P*.t_Op
It is used to set the operating time delay for stage * of phase undervoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)
It shall be set according to voltage control strategy.
7. 27P*.t_DropOut
It is used to set the dropout time delay for stage * of phase undervoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)
This setting is valid when definite-time drop-out characteristic is selected, and its recommended
value is 0.

Date: 2021-02-02
8. 27P*.En_VTS_Blk
It is used to enable/disable stage * of phase undervoltage protection is blocked by VT circuit failure

when VT circuit supervision is enabled and VT circuit fails. (*=1 or 2)
When the setting [27P*.En_VTS_Blk] is set as "Enabled", phase undervoltage protection will be
blocked if VT circuit fails.
9. 27P*.En
It is used to enable/disable stage * of phase undervoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)
10. 27P*.Opt_Trp/Alm
3 It is used to enable/disable stage * of phase undervoltage protection operate to trip or alarm. (*=1
or 2)
11. 27P*.Opt_Curve
It is used to select the operating characteristics curve for stage * of phase undervoltage protection.
(*=1 or 2)
InvTime_U: Voltage Inverse
12. 27P*.Opt_Curve_DropOut
It is used to select the dropout characteristics curve for stage * of phase undervoltage protection.
(*=1 or 2)
13. 27P*.TMS
It is used to set time multiplier setting for stage * of inverse-time phase undervoltage protection.
(*=1 or 2)
The setting can be deduced according to the operating time required by inverse-time phase
undervoltage protection.

Date: 2021-02-02
14. 27P*.tmin
It is used to set the minimum operating time for stage * of inverse-time phase undervoltage
When inverse-time characteristics is selected, if calculated operating time is less than the setting
[27P*.tmin], then the operating time changes to the setting [27P*.tmin] automatically. Its
recommended value is 0.03s.
15. 27P*.K
It is used to set the constant “K” for stage * of customized inverse-time phase undervoltage
3
undervoltage protection. It is valid only if the setting [27P*.Opt_Curve] is set as "UserDefine".
16. 27P*.Alpha
It is used to set the constant “α” for stage * of customized inverse-time phase undervoltage
17. 27P*.C
It is used to set the constant “C” for stage * of customized inverse-time phase undervoltage
3.20 Overfrequency Protection (81O)
3.20.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsFreqProt Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsFreqProt Settings
3.20.2 Setting List

Table 3.20-1 Overfrequency protection settings
81.Upp_Blk 10.000~150.000 0.001 V

Date: 2021-02-02
81O1.f_Set 50.000~65.000 0.001 Hz
81O1.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
81O1.En
Enabled
81O2.f_Set 50.000~65.000 0.001 Hz
81O2.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s

3 Disabled
81O2.En
Enabled
81O3.f_Set 50.000~65.000 0.001 Hz
81O3.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
81O3.En
Enabled
81O4.f_Set 50.000~65.000 0.001 Hz
81O4.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
81O4.En
Enabled
1. 81.Upp_Blk
It is used to set the phase-to-phase voltage setting used to block frequency protection (including
overfrequency protection, underfrequency protection and frequency rate-of-change protection).
When any phase-to-phase voltage is smaller than the setting [81.Upp_Blk], the frequency
protection will be blocked. It is a general setting and shared by overfrequency protection,
underfrequency protection and frequency rate-of-change protection.
The setting should be set according to the phase-to-phase voltage. Its recommended value is
0.7Unn (Unn is rated phase-to-phase voltage).
2. 81O*.f_Set
It is used to set the frequency setting for stage * of overfrequency protection. (*=1~4)
All stages can be set based on the same graduation. After rejecting some power supplies and
each stage operating, the system frequency should be restored near rated frequency. Because
compound mode of generators (hydroelectric, thermal power, nuclear power with different capacity

Date: 2021-02-02
and proportion, different adaptability to abnormal frequency), system structure and operation
mode are different in different power system, they should be set according to system frequency
and stability control strategy.
3. 81O*.t_Op
It is used to set the time delay for stage * of overfrequency protection. (*=1~4)
It shall be set according to system frequency and stability control strategy.
4. 81O*.En
It is used to enable/disable stage * of overfrequency protection (*=1~4)

3
3.21 Underfrequency Protection (81U)
3.21.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
⚫ PCS-Studio
3.21.2 Setting List

Table 3.21-1 Underfrequency protection settings
81.Upp_Blk 10.000~150.000 0.001 V
81U1.f_Set 45.000~60.000 0.001 Hz
81U1.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
81U1.En
Enabled
81U2.f_Set 45.000~60.000 0.001 Hz
81U2.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
81U2.En
Enabled
81U3.f_Set 45.000~60.000 0.001 Hz
81U3.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s

Date: 2021-02-02
Disabled
81U3.En
Enabled
81U4.f_Set 45.000~60.000 0.001 Hz
81U4.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
81U4.En
Enabled
3
1. 81.Upp_Blk
Please refer to Section 3.20.
2. 81U*.f_Set
It is used to set the frequency setting for stage * of underfrequency protection. (*=1~6)
All stages can adopt cascade connection, and small graduation can be set among them, for
example, taking 0.2Hz. Selecting one special stage, it can avoid system frequency always keeping
in a certain frequency. When some loads are shed after other stages of underfrequency protection
operate to shed major loads and make system frequency restore to normal value.
3. 81U*.t_Op
It is used to set the time delay for stage * of underfrequency protection. (*=1~6)
It shall be set according to system frequency and stability control strategy.
4. 81U*.En
It is used to enable/disable stage * of underfrequency protection (*=1~6)
3.22 Frequency Rate-of-change Protection (81R)
3.22.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
⚫ PCS-Studio

Date: 2021-02-02
3.22.2 Setting List

Table 3.22-1 Frequency rate-of-change protection settings
81.Upp_Blk 10.000~150.000 0.001 V
81R1.df/dt_Set -5.000~5.000 0.001 Hz/s
81R1.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s
81R1.f_Pkp 45.000~65.000 0.001 Hz
Disabled
3
81R1.En
Enabled
81R2.df/dt_Set -5.000~5.000 0.001 Hz/s
81R2.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s
81R2.f_Pkp 45.000~65.000 0.001 Hz
Disabled
81R2.En
Enabled
81R3.df/dt_Set -5.000~5.000 0.001 Hz/s
81R3.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s
81R3.f_Pkp 45.000~65.000 0.001 Hz
Disabled
81R3.En
Enabled
81R4.df/dt_Set -5.000~5.000 0.001 Hz/s
81R4.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s
81R4.f_Pkp 45.000~65.000 0.001 Hz
Disabled
81R4.En
Enabled
1. 81.Upp_Blk
Please refer to Section 3.20.
2. 81R*.df/dt_Set
It is used to set the frequency rate-of-change setting for stage * of frequency rate-of-change

Date: 2021-02-02
protection. (*=1~6)
If the system frequency quickly decreases due to large active power shortage after the system
fault, it is required to remove the overload line as soon as possible, to avoid frequency collapse,
and its recommended value is -0.8~-2Hz/s.
If the system frequency quickly increases due to surplus system power (more than 20%), the
generator rejection should be executed, to avoid the frequency increasing, and its recommended
value is 0.8~2Hz/s.
3. 81R*.t_Op
3 It is used to set the time delay for stage * of frequency rate-of-change protection. (*=1~6)
It shall be set according to the requirement of the system frequency.
Its recommended value is 0.1~0.2s.
4. 81R*.f_Pkp
It is used to set the pickup frequency setting for stage * of frequency rate-of-change protection.
(*=1~6)
It should be set according to the requirement of the system frequency.
Its recommended value is 50Hz or 60Hz.
5. 81R*.En
It is used to enable/disable stage * of frequency rate-of-change protection (*=1~6)
3.23 Reverse Power Protection (32R)
3.23.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsRevPower Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsRevPower Settings
3.23.2 Setting List

Table 3.23-1 Reverse power protection settings
32R1.U1_VCE 5.000~60.000 0.001 V
32R1.I1_CCE 0.010~1.000 0.001 p.u.
32R1.U2_VCE 8.000~60.000 0.001 V

Date: 2021-02-02
32R1.P_Set 0.100~10.000 0.001 p.u.
32R1.t_Op 0.010~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
32R1.En
Enabled
Trp
32R1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm
32R2.U1_VCE 5.000~60.000 0.001 V

3
32R2.I1_CCE 0.010~1.000 0.001 p.u.
32R2.U2_VCE 8.000~60.000 0.001 V
32R2.P_Set 0.100~10.000 0.001 p.u.
32R2.t_Op 0.010~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
32R2.En
Enabled
Trp
32R2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm
1. 32R*.U1_VCE
It is used to set the positive-sequence voltage setting which is used to block stage * of reverse
power protection. (*=1or 2)
2. 32R*.I1_CCE
It is used to set the positive-sequence current setting which is used to block stage * of reverse
Its recommended value is 0.1p.u.
The rated secondary current is [𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑡. 𝐶𝐵𝑥. 𝐼2𝑛 ].
3. 32R*.U2_VCE
It is used to set the negative-sequence voltage setting which is used to block stage * of reverse

Date: 2021-02-02
4. 32R*.P_Set
It is used to set the power setting for stage * of reverse power protection. (*=1or 2)
Generally, it should be set according to the minimum measurable power under reverse power
conditions.
The recommended value is 0.01 p.u.~0.03 p.u..
The rated secondary power is √3 × [𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑡. 𝐶𝐵𝑥. 𝐼2𝑛 ] × [𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑡. 𝑈2𝑛 ].
5. 32R*.t_Op
3 The operating time delay for stage * of reverse power protection (*=1or 2)
It should be set according to the affordability of the protected equipment.
6. 32R*.En
It is used to enable/disable stage * of reverse power protection. (*=1 or 2)
7. 32R*.Opt_Trp/Alm
It is used to enable/disable stage * of reverse power protection operate to trip or alarm. (*=1 or 2)
3.24 Undercurrent Protection (37)
3.24.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsUC Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsUC Settings
3.24.2 Setting List

Table 3.24-1 Undercurrent protection settings
37.I_Set (0.100~1.000)×In 0.001 A
37.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s
1P
37.Opt_1P/3P
3P

Date: 2021-02-02
None
Curr
37.Opt_LogicMode CBPos
CurrOrCBPos
CurrAndCBPos
Disabled
37.En
Enabled
Trp
3
37.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm
1. 37.I_Set
It is used to set the current setting of undercurrent protection.
The setting should ensure that undercurrent protection can reliably operate after the bus
connected with the capacitor loses the voltage, and undercurrent protection can reliably drop off
after the bus voltage returns to normal
The calculation principle is as below.
[37. 𝐼_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = (0.3~0.6) × 𝐼2𝑛
2. 37.t_Op
It is used to set the time delay of undercurrent protection.
It should coordinate with the operating time of backup protection of outgoing line at local end.
The calculation principle is as below.
[37. 𝑡_𝑂𝑝] = 𝑡 ′ + ∆𝑡
Where:
𝑡 ′ is the operating time of backup protection which undercurrent protection need to coordinate
with.
∆𝑡 is the time difference which can take 0.3~0.5s.
3. 37.Opt_1P/3P
It is used to select the current criterion used by undercurrent protection.
3P: 3-out-of-3 mode
1P: 1-out-of-3 mode

Date: 2021-02-02
If the setting is set as "1P", undercurrent protection will discriminate any phase current with the
current criterion. If the setting is set as "3P", undercurrent protection will discriminate three-phases
currents with the current criterion.
4. 37.Opt_LogicMode
It is used to select auxiliary criterion mode for undercurrent protection.
None: no check
Curr: check current condition
CBPos: check normally open auxiliary contact

3 CurrOrCBPos: check current condition or normally open auxiliary contact
CurrAndCBPos: check current condition and normally open auxiliary contact
Please select the check mode according to the actual application.
When the load current is relatively constant and is larger than 0.04In, the setting is recommende to
set as "Curr", such as the capacitor and reactor load. Otherwise, it is recommended to set as
"CBPos".
When the CB position can be acquired, and the load current is also larger than 0.04In, the setting
is recommende to set as "CurrAndCBPos".
When the circuit breaker of incoming line has been tripped and the busbar loses voltage,
undercurrent protection is still desired to operate at this time, the setting is recommended to set as
"CBPos".
If the CB position cannot be acquired, the setting is recommended to set as "None". However, the
other method should be adopted to ensure that undercurrent protection will not always operate
before the equipment is put into operation because the circuit breaker is not closed and there is no
current at this time, and undercurrent protection can reliably drop off after the abnormal condition
disappears.
5. 37.En
It is used to enable/disable undercurrent protection.
6. 37.Opt_Trp/Alm
It is used to enable/disable undercurrent protection operate to trip or alarm.

Date: 2021-02-02
3.25 Breaker Failure Protection (50BF)
3.25.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsUC Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsUC Settings
3.25.2 Setting List 3

Table 3.25-1 Breaker failure protection settings
CBx.50BF.I_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
CBx.50BF.3I0_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
CBx.50BF.I2_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
CBx.50BF.t_ReTrp 0.000~20.000 0.001 s
CBx.50BF.t1_Op 0.000~20.000 0.001 s
CBx.50BF.t2_Op 0.000~20.000 0.001 s
Disabled
CBx.50BF.En
Enabled
Disabled
CBx.50BF.En_ReTrp
Enabled
Disabled
CBx.50BF.En_t1
Enabled
Disabled
CBx.50BF.En_t2
Enabled
Disabled
CBx.50BF.En_3I0_1P
Enabled
Disabled
CBx.50BF.En_Ip
Enabled
CBx.50BF.En_3I0_3P Disabled

Date: 2021-02-02
Enabled
Disabled
CBx.50BF.En_I2_3P
Enabled
Disabled
CBx.50BF.En_CB_Ctrl
Enabled
Disabled
3 CBx.50BF.En_Alm_Init
Enabled
1. CBx.50BF.I_Set
It is used to set the phase current setting of detecting breaker failure protection.
The measured phase current is used to detect the circuit breaker failure. The setting should can
detect the fault with small fault current. It could be chosen in accordance with the most sensitive
protection function that initiate the breaker failure protection.
2. CBx.50BF.3I0_Set
It is used to set the zero-sequence current setting of detecting breaker failure protection.
In the grouded systems via high impedance, the residual current is normally much smaller than the
short-circuit currents for the single-phase earth fault. In order to reliably detect the circuit breaker
failure under the single-phase earth fault, it is necessary to add the zero-sequence current
detection by the setting [CBx.50BF.En_3I0_1P] (set as "Enabled"). At this time, the phase current
setting [CBx.50BF.I_Set] could be set more sensitive.
Taking into account that the faulty current is too small for generator or transformer fault, the
sensitivity of phase current element may not meet the requirements, zero-sequence current
criterion and negative-sequence current criterion are provided in addition to the phase overcurrent
element for breaker failure protection initiated by input signal [CBx.50BF.ExTrp3P] from external
tripping. They can be enabled or disabled by the settings [CBx.50BF.En_3I0_3P] and
[CBx.50BF.En_I2_3P] respectively.
The setting [CBx.50BF.3I0_Set] shall be greater than maximum zero-sequence unbalance current
(3I0) under normal operation condition.
3. CBx.50BF.I2_Set
It is used to set the negative-sequence current setting of detecting breaker failure protection.
The setting [CBx.50BF.I2_Set] shall be greater than maximum negative-sequence unbalance

current (I2) under normal operation condition.
Its recommended setting principle can refer to the setting [CBx.50BF.3I0_Set].

Date: 2021-02-02
4. CBx.50BF.t_ReTrp
It is used to set the re-trip time delay of breaker failure protection.
The setting defines the time delay of re-tripping for breaker failure protection, generally set as
5ms~50ms.
Its recommended value is 50ms.
5. CBx.50BF.t1_Op
It is used to set the time delay for the first stage of breaker failure protection.
Breaker failure protection will send three-phase tripping command to trip local circuit breaker when
the time delay of [CBx.50BF.t1_Op] is expired. The setting [CBx.50BF.t1_Op] is set as short as
3
possible on the premise that the selectivity of breaker failure protection is warrantable.
The recommended setting principle is as follows.
[CBx.50BF.t1_Op]=t0+tB+Δt
Where:
t0 is circuit breaker operation time, generally taken as 0.03~0.06s.
tB is the drop off time of the operation element, generally taken as 0.02~0.04s.
Δt is safty margin time, generally taken as 0.03s.
Normally, it is used to trip local circuit breaker again before the second stage of breaker failure
protection operating in case that the local circuit breaker could open to prevent to trip the adjacent
circuit breakers.
6. CBx.50BF.t2_Op
It is used to set the time delay for the second stage of breaker failure protection.
Breaker failure protection will send three-phase tripping command to trip adjacent circuit breakers
when the time delay of [CBx.50BF.t2_Op] is expired. The setting [CBx.50BF.t2_Op] is set as short
as possible on the premise that the selectivity of breaker failure protection is warrantable and
undesired operation must be avoided. Besides, the setting should be greater than the setting
[CBx.50BF.t1_Op] with safety margin.
The recommended setting principle is as follows.
[CBx.50BF.t2_Op]=t0+tB+Δt
Where:
t0 is circuit breaker operation time, generally taken as 0.03~0.06s.
tB is the drop off time of the operation element, generally taken as 0.02~0.04s.
Δt is safty time, generally taken as 0.1s.

Date: 2021-02-02
The stage of breaker failure protection with time delay of [CBx.50BF.t1_Op]

will only trip local circuit breaker by three phase, and the stage with time
delay of [CBx.50BF.t2_Op] will trip all adjacent circuit breakers.
7. CBx.50BF.En
It is used to enable/disable breaker failure protection.
3 It is a general control setting for breaker failure protection.
8. CBx.50BF.En_ReTrp
It is used to enable/disable re-trip function of breaker failure protection.
When the setting is set as "Enabled", the instantaneous re-tripping function is in service.
After receiving tripping signal from the device and the corresponding current criterion or CB
position criterion is met, then the re-trip command will be issued to trip local circuit breaker.
9. CBx.50BF.En_t1
It is used to enable/disable the first stage of breaker failure protection.
10. CBx.50BF.En_t2
It is used to enable/disable the second stage of breaker failure protection.
11. CBx.50BF.En_3I0_1P
It is used to enable/disable the zero-sequence current criterion of breaker failure protection.
12. CBx.50BF.En_Ip
It is used to enable/disable phase overcurrent criterion of breaker failure protection via external
three-phases initiating signal "CBx.50BF.ExTrp3P".
When the seting is set as "Enabled", the phase current criterion via external three-phases
initiating signal "CBx.50BF.ExTrp3P" is valid.
13. CBx.50BF.En_3I0_3P
It is used to enable/disable zero-sequence overcurrent criterion of breaker failure protection via

external three-phases initiating signal "CBx.50BF.ExTrp3P".
14. CBx.50BF.En_I2_3P
It is used to enable/disable negative-sequence overcurrent criterion of breaker failure protection

Date: 2021-02-02
via external three-phases initiating signal "CBx.50BF.ExTrp3P".
15. CBx.50BF.En_CB_Ctrl
It is used to enable/disable breaker failure protection be initiated by CB open position via external
three-phases initiating signal "CBx.50BF.ExTrp3P".
For some special protection (for example, mechanical protection or voltage protection), the fault
current maybe is too small to meet the current criterion when they operate. In order to make
breaker failure protection can also operate under the above situation, CB open position is used
instead of the current criterion. The precondition is that binary input signal [CBx.50BF.ExTrp_WOI]
should be assigned by external trip signal.
3
16. CBx.50BF.En_Alm_Init
It is used to enable/disable abnormality check of breaker failure initiating signal.
It is used to enable/disable the supervision of binary input initiating signal of breaker failure
protection. If the setting is set as "Enabled", and the initiating status of the binary input signal
maintains more than 10s, then the binary input initiating signal will be considered as invalid and an
alarm "CBx.50BF.Alm_Int" will be issued. If it is set as "Disabled", then the binary input signal will
not be supervised.
3.26 Stub Differential Protection (87STB)
3.26.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsStub Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsStub Settings
3.26.2 Setting List

Table 3.26-1 Stub differential protection settings
87STB.I_Pkp (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
87STB.I_Alm (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
87STB.Slope 0.300~1.000 0.001
87STB.t_Op 0.000~200.000 0.001 s

Date: 2021-02-02
Disabled
87STB.En
Enabled
Disabled
87STB.En_Diff_Alm
Enabled
Disabled
87STB.En_CTS_Blk
Enabled
3
1. 87STB.I_Pkp
It is used to set pickup current setting of stub differential protection.
It shall be greater than the maximal unbalance current under normal rated load, i.e.,
[87STB.I_Pkp]=KRel×(Ker+Δm)×In
Where:
In is secondary rated current.
KRel is reliability coefficient (generally taken as 1.3~1.5).
Ker is the ratio errors of CT (k=0.03X2 for class 10P, k=0.01X2 for clase 5P and TP).
Δm is the error caused by the difference between CT ratios at two sides, and 0.05 is
recommended.
This setting should ensure sensitive enough for internal fault with the minimum operation mode
and the sensitivity coefficient is not smaller than 1.5.
Generally, the fault current for stub zone fault is high, the recommended setting value is not less
than 0.5In.
2. 87STB.I_Alm
It is used to set current setting of differential current alarm.
The setting is used to detect the abnormal current condition, such as CT circuit fail, it should be
greater than the maximal unbalance current under normal load operation condition.
This setting is suggested to be more sensitive than [87STB.I_Pkp].
3. 87STB.Slope
It is used to set slope of current differential protection.
The setting is the slope of current differential protection operate-restrain characteristic. This setting
should be given according to the system condition and its application.

Date: 2021-02-02
4. 87STB.t_Op
It is used to set time delay of stub differential protection.
Generally, this setting is set as zero. In special cases, it can be set with additional time delay, for
example for reverse interlocking.
5. 87STB.En
It is used to enable/disable stub differential protection.
6. 87STB.En_Alm
It is used to enable/disable differential current alarm function.

3
7. 87STB.En_CTS_Blk
It is used to enable/disable stub differential protection controlled by CT circuit failure.
If the alarm signal of differential current abnormality [87STB.Alm_Diff] is issued, stub differential
protection will be blocked if [87STB.En_CTS_Blk] is set as "Enabled"
3.27 Dead Zone Protection (50DZ)
3.27.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsDZP Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsDZP Settings
3.27.2 Setting List

Table 3.27-1 Dead zone protection settings
CBx.50DZ.I_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
CBx.50DZ.t_Op 0.000~30.000 0.001 s
Disabled
CBx.50DZ.En
Enabled
Disabled
CBx.50DZ.En_Alm_Init
Enabled

Date: 2021-02-02

1. CBx.50DZ.I_Set
It is used to set the phase current setting of dead zone protection.
2. CBx.50DZ.t_Op
It is used to set the time delay of dead zone protection.

3 3. CBx.50DZ.En
It is used to enable/disable dead zone protection.
4. CBx.50DZ.En_Alm_Init
It is used to enable/disable abnormality check of initiating signal for dead zone protection.
3.28 Broken Conductor Protection (46BC)
3.28.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsBCP Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsBCP Settings
3.28.2 Setting List

Table 3.28-1 Broken conductor protection settings
46BC.I_Min (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
46BC.I2/I1_Set 0.000~5.000 0.001
46BC.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
46BC.En
Enabled
Trp
46BC.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

Date: 2021-02-02

1. 46BC.I_Min
It is used to set minimum operating current setting of broken conductor protection.
2. 46BC.I2/I1_Set
It is used to set ratio setting (negative-sequence current to positive-sequence current) of broken

conductor protection
The network of single-phase broken condition is similar to that of two-phases earthing fault, 3
positive-sequence, negative-sequence and zero-sequence network is connected in parallel,
I2/I1=Z0/(Z0+Z2), generally, zero-sequence impedance is larger than positive-sequence
impedance, i.e., I2/I1>0.5. The network of two-phases broken condition is similar to that of
single-phase earthing fault, positive-sequence, negative-sequence and zero-sequence network is
connected in series, so I2/I1=1. Hence, broken conductor protection based on the ratio of
negative-sequence current to positive-sequence current can detect the broken-conductor fault.
3. 46BC.t_Op
It is used to set the time delay of broken conductor protection.
Its recommended value is 1s.
4. 46BC.En
It is used to enable/disable broken conductor protection.
5. 46BC.Opt_Trp/Alm
It is used to enable/disable broken conductor protection operate to trip or alarm.
3.29 Pole Discrepancy Protection (62PD)
3.29.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsPDP Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsPDP Settings

Date: 2021-02-02
3.29.2 Setting List

Table 3.29-1 Pole discrepancy protection settings
CBx.62PD.3I0_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
CBx.62PD.I2_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
CBx.62PD.t_Op 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
Disabled
3 CBx.62PD.En
Enabled
Disabled
CBx.62PD.En_3I0/I2_Ctrl
Enabled
Disabled
CBx.62PD.En_Init_Alm
Enabled
1. CBx.62PD.3I0_Set
It is used to set residual current setting of pole discrepancy protection.
In order to improve the reliability of pole discrepancy protection, zero-sequence current element
can be selected as auxiliary criterion.
2. CBx.62PD.I2_Set
It is used to set negative-sequence current setting of pole discrepancy protection.
In order to improve the reliability of pole discrepancy protection, negative-sequence current

element can be selected as auxiliary criterion.
3. CBx.62PD.t_Op
It is used to set time delay of pole discrepancy protection.
4. CBx.62PD.En
It is used to enable/disable pole discrepancy protection.
5. CBx.62PD.En_3I0/I2_Ctrl
It is used to enable/disable residual current criterion and negative-sequence current criterion for

Date: 2021-02-02
pole discrepancy protection.
If the setting is set as "Enabled" pole discrepancy protection can operate only when the
zero-sequence current element or negative-sequence current element meet the criterion.
6. CBx.62PD.En_Alm_Init
It is used to enable/disable abnormality check of initiating signal for pole discrepancy protection.
3.30 Transfer Trip (TT)
3.30.1 Access Path 3

⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsTT Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsTT Settings
3.30.2 Setting List

Table 3.30-1 Transfer trip settings
TT.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
TT.En
Enabled
Disabled
TT.En_FD_Ctrl
Enabled
Disabled
TT.En_BlkAR
Enabled
Disabled
TT.En_CB_Ctrl
Enabled
1. TT.t_Op
It is used to set the time delay of transfer trip.

Date: 2021-02-02
2. TT.En
It is used to enable/disable transfer trip.
3. TT.En_FD_Ctrl
It is used to enable/disable transfer trip controlled by local fault detector element.
If the setting is set as "Enabled", transfer trip can operate only when the device picks up.
4. TT.En_BlkAR
It is used to enable/disable transfer trip operate to block AR.
3 5. TT.En_CB_Ctrl
It is used to enable/disable transfer trip controlled by circuit breaker position.
If the setting is set as "Enabled", transfer trip can operate only when the circuit breaker of any
phase is in closed position.
3.31 Trip Logic (TRP)
3.31.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsTrip Logic Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsTrip Logic Settings
3.31.2 Setting List

Table 3.31-1 Trip logic settings
Disabled
En_MPF_Blk_AR
Enabled
Disabled
En_3PF_Blk_AR
Enabled
Line.t_PhSFail 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
Line.En_PhSFail
Enabled
Line.En_PhSF_Blk_AR Disabled

Date: 2021-02-02
Enabled
t_Dwell_Trp 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
CBx.En_Trp3P
Enabled
1. En_MPF_Blk_AR
3
It is used to enable/disable auto-reclosing blocked when multi-phase fault happens.
2. En_3PF_Blk_AR
It is used to enable/disable auto-reclosing blocked when three-phase fault happens.
3. Line.t_PhSFail
It is used to set the time delay of confirming faulty phase selection failure.
4. Line.En_PhSFail
It is used to enable/disable faulty phase selection failure.
5. Line.En_PhSF_Blk_AR
It is used to enable/disable auto-reclosing blocked when faulty phase selection fails.
6. t_Dwell_Trp
It is used to set the dwell time of tripping command.
The tripping contact shall drop off when the faulty current disappears or the protection element
drops off. It ensures that the tripping pulse will be kept as same as the setting [t_Dwell_Trp] at
least after the tripping signal is issued.
7. CBx.En_Trp3P
It is used to enable/disable three-phase tripping mode of circuit breaker No.x for any fault
conditions.
3.32 Automatic Reclosure (79)
3.32.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsAR Settings

Date: 2021-02-02
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsAR Settings
3.32.2 Setting List

Table 3.32-1 AR settings

Config
CBx.79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode
Setting
Disabled
CBx.79.En_SynChk
3 Enabled
Disabled
CBx.79.En_SynDd_RefDd
Enabled
Disabled
CBx.79.En_SynLv_RefDd
Enabled
Disabled
CBx.79.En_SynDd_RefLv
Enabled
Disabled
CBx.79.En_NoChk
Enabled
CBx.79.Num 1~4 1
CBx.79.t_Dd_1PS1 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
CBx.79.t_Dd_3PS1 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
CBx.79.t_Dd_3PS2 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
CBx.79.t_Dd_3PS3 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
CBx.79.t_Dd_3PS4 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
CBx.79.t_CBClsd 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
CBx.79.t_CBReady 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
CBx.79.t_Wait_Chk 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
CBx.79.t_Reclaim 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
CBx.79.t_DDO_Blk 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
CBx.79.t_AddDly 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
CBx.79.t_WaitMaster 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
CBx.79.t_SecFault 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
CBx.79.t_PersistTrp 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
CBx.79.t_Fail 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
CBx.79.t_PW 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
Disabled
CBx.79.En_AddDly
Enabled

Date: 2021-02-02

Disabled
CBx.79.En_FailCheck
Enabled
Disabled
CBx.79.En_PDF_Blk
Enabled
Disabled
CBx.79.En_CutPulse
Enabled
Disabled
CBx.79.En
Enabled
Setting
CBx.79.Opt_Enable
Setting&Config 3
Disabled
CBx.79.En_CBInit
Enabled
None
CBx.79.Opt_Priority High
Low
Config
CBx.79.Opt_ValidMode
Setting
Disabled
CBx.79.En_1P
Enabled
Disabled
CBx.79.En_3P
Enabled
Disabled
CBx.79.En_1P/3P
Enabled
1. CBx.79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode
It is used to select the control source of synchronism check mode for AR.
Synchronism check mode can be selected by external signal via binary inputs or internal logic
settings. If the setting [CBx.79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode] set as "Setting", synchronism check mode
is determined by the internal logic settings. If the settings [CBx.79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode] set as
"Config", AR mode is determined by the input signals
Config: select synchronism check mode for AR by configuration signals
CBx.79.Sel_SynChk
CBx.79.Sel_SynDd_RefDd
CBx.79.Sel_SynLv_RefDd
CBx.79.Sel_SynDd_RefLv
CBx.79.Sel_NoChk
If the settings [CBx.79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode] set as "Config", and there is on binary input was

Date: 2021-02-02
energized, then the synchronism check mode for AR is abnormal and the alarm signal will be
issued.
Setting: select synchronism check mode for AR by the settings
CBx.79.En_SynChk
CBx.79.En_SynDd_RefDd
CBx.79.En_SynLv_RefDd
CBx.79.En_SynDd_RefLv
3 CBx.79.En_NoChk
If the settings [CBx.79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode] set as "Setting", and all corresponding settings are
set as "Disabled", then the synchronism check mode for AR is abnormal and the alarm signal will
be issued.
2. CBx.79.En_SynChk
It is used to enable/disable synchronism check for AR.
It is valid only if the setting [CBx.79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode] is set as "Setting".
3. CBx.79.En_SynDd_RefDd
It is used to enable/disable dead synchronization voltage and dead reference voltage check for
AR.
4. CBx.79.En_SynLv_RefDd.
It is used to enable/disable live synchronization voltage and dead reference voltage check for AR.
5. CBx.79.En_SynDd_RefLv
It is used to enable/disable dead synchronization voltage and live reference voltage check for AR.
6. CBx.79.En_NoChk
It is used to enable/disable no check for AR.
7. CBx.79.Num
It is used to set maximum number of reclosing attempts.
The AR function could be set as one-shot or multi-shot. Through the setting [CBx.79.N_Rcls], the
maximum number of reclosing attempts can be set up to 4 times. Generally, only one-shot AR is
selected.

Date: 2021-02-02
The table below shows the number of reclose attempts with respect to the settings and AR modes.
1-pole AR 3-pole AR 1/3-pole AR

Setting Value
N-1AR N-3AR N-1AR N-3AR N-1AR N-3AR
1 1 0 0 1 1 1
2 1 0 0 2 1 2
3 1 0 0 3 1 3
4 1 0 0 4 1 4
N-1AR: the reclosing number of 1-pole AR
N-3AR: the reclosing number of 3-pole AR

3
8. CBx.79.t_Dd_1PS1
It is used to set dead time of first shot 1-pole reclosing.
The setting should be set according to system stability requirement, meanwhile, arc-extinguishing
of instantaneous fault and insulation recovery ability should also be considered. Generally, this
setting is greater than 0.5s, 1.0s is recommended.
9. CBx.79.t_Dd_3PS1
It is used to set dead time of first shot 3-pole reclosing.
The setting should be set according to system stability requirement, arc-extinguishing of

instantaneous fault and insulation recovery ability should also be considered. In addition,
possibility for two-side protection (double power supply) to cut off fault with different time limit
should be taken into consideration.
10. CBx.79.t_Dd_3PS2
It is used to set dead time of second shot 3-pole reclosing.
It will be active only if the setting [CBx.79.Num] is set as more than 1.
It is used to set dead time of third shot 3-pole reclosing.
It is used to set dead time of fourth shot 3-pole reclosing.

Date: 2021-02-02
13. CBx.79.t_CBClsd
It is used to set the waiting time needed by the circuit-breaker to obtain the AR ready state after
the circuit breaker is closed.
It is the minimum time delay for circuit breaker in closed position before AR gets ready. The
duration of the circuit breaker in closed position before fault occurrence is not less than the setting
[CBx.79.t_CBClsd] for a successful reclosing.
14. CBx.79.t_CBReady
3 It is used to set time delay to wait for CB healthy, and begin to timing when the input signal
[CBx.79.CB_Healthy] is de-energized and if it is not energized within this time delay, AR will be
blocked.
The input signal [CBx.79.CB_Healthy] must be energized before auto-reclosure gets ready.
Because most circuit breakers can finish one complete process: open-closed-open, it is necessary
that circuit breaker has enough energy before reclosing. When the dead time delay of AR is
exhausted, if the input signal [CBx.79.CB_Healthy] is still not energized within time delay
[CBx.79.t_CBReady], AR will be blocked. If this function is not required, the input signal
[CBx.79.CB_Healthy] can be not to configure, and its logical state will be thought as "1" by default.
15. CBx.79.t_Wait_Chk
It is used to set maximum wait time for synchronism check.
The setting is the maximum allowable time used for synchronism check. It is valid only if the
synchronism check mode is selected. If the synchronism check condition is not met after the delay
time elapsed, the synchronism check failed and the auto-reclosing will be blocked.
16. CBx.79.t_Reclaim
It is reclaim time of AR.
The reset time of circuit breaker after auto-reclosing operation. With the assignment of the close
command, the automatic reclosing function goes into the reclaim time state. During this time, it is
decided if the current reclosing cycle was successful or not.
⚫ If during the reclaim time no further tripping occurs, the currently running automatic reclosing
cycle was successful.
⚫ If during the reclaim time another tripping occurred, the currently running automatic reclosing
cycle was not successful. If other automatic reclosing cycles are permitted, one of these
cycles will be used to continue the process. In contrast, if the currently executed cycle was the
last permissible cycle, the automatic reclosing process will end and be reported as
unsuccessful.

Date: 2021-02-02
17. CBx.79.t_DDO_Blk
It is used to set dropout time delay of blocking AR, when blocking signal for AR disappears, AR
blocking condition drops out after this time delay.
AR will be blocked immediately once the blocking condition of AR appears, and the blocking
condition of AR will drop off with a time delay [CBx.79.t_DDO_BlkAR] after blocking signal
disappears.
18. CBx.79.t_AddDly
It is used to set additional time delay for AR. 3

AR will be initiated by the tripping of the device. In the process of channel abnormality, an internal
fault occurs on the transmission line, backup protection at both ends of line will operate to trip the
circuit breaker at each end. The operation time of backup protection at both ends of the line is
possibly inconsist, while the time delay of AR needs to consider the arc-extinguishing and
insulation recovery ability for transient fault, so the time delay of AR shall be considered
comprehensively according to the operation time of the device at both ends. When the
communication channel of main protection is abnormal (input signal [CBx.79.PLC_Lost] is
energized), and the setting [CBx.79.En_AddDly] is set as "Enabled", then the dead time delay of
AR shall be equal to the original dead time delay of AR plus the extra time delay
[CBx.79.t_AddDly], so as to ensure the recovery of insulation intensity of fault point when reclosing
after transient fault. This extra time delay [CBx.79.t_AddDly] is only valid for the first shot AR. This
time should consider the operation time difference between both sides.
19. CBx.79.t_WaitMaster
It is used to set maximum wait time for reclosing permissive signal from master AR.
The setting defines the maximum wait time for reclosing permissive signal from master AR. To
prevent further impacts by slave AR reclosing, the output signal "CBx.79.WaitToSlave" of master
AR is usually configured to the signal "CBx.79.WaitMaster" of slave AR. Slave AR is permissible to
reclosing only if master AR is reclosed successfully.
This setting should cooperate with the setting [CBx.79.Opt_Priority]. It is invalid if the setting
[CBx.79.Opt_Priority] is set as "None".
20. CBx.79.t_SecFault
It is used to set the time delay of discriminating another fault in the AR inprogress period. The
timer starts count after 1-pole AR initiated, if another fault happens during this time delay, 3-pole
AR will be initiated. If another fault happens after that time, It will be recognized as the second fault
and AR will be blocked if the setting [CBx.79.En_PDF_Blk] is set as "Enabled".
21. CBx.79.t_PersistTrp
It is used to set time delay of excessive trip signal to block AR.

Date: 2021-02-02
When there is a fault on an overhead line, the concerned circuit breakers will be tripped normally.
After fault is cleared, the tripping command will drop off immediately. In case the circuit breaker is
in failure, etc., and the tripping signal of the circuit breaker maintains and exceeds the time delay
[CBx.79.t_PersistTrp], AR will be blocked. This setting should be longer than the longest tripping
time of circuit breaker plus safety margin.
22. CBx.79.t_Fail
It is used to set the time delay waiting for CB close position to conform reclosing successful.
3 The setting is the time delay from reclosing command sent to unsuccessful reclosing, which shall
be greater than the reclosing operation time of circuit breaker. This time will be valid if the setting
[CBx.79.En_FailCheck] is set as "Enabled".
⚫ If during the time CB is closed, the currently running automatic reclosing cycle was
successful.
⚫ If during the time CB remains open, the currently running automatic reclosing cycle was not
successful, the automatic reclosing process will end and be reported as fail.
If the reclosing is considered as unsuccessful, the device will issue a signal (CBx.79.Fail_Rcls) to
indicate that the reclosing is unsuccessful. AR will not enter into the ready state unless the circuit
breaker position drops off , and can only begin to enter into the ready state again after the circuit
breaker is closed.
23. CBx.79.t_PW
It is used to set pulse width of AR closing signal.
The setting shall be set according to actual requirements, if no tripping latch circuit, then the value
should be greater than the reclosing time of circuit breaker.
For the circuit breaker without anti-pump interlock, the setting [CBx.79.En_CutPulse] is available
to control the reclosing pulse. When this function is enabled, if the device operates to trip during
reclosing, the reclosing pulse will drop off immediately, so as to prevent multi-shot reclosing onto
fault.
24. CBx.79.En_AddDly
It is used to enable/disable auto-reclosing with an additional dead time delay.
Its recommended setting principle can refer to the setting [CBx.79.t_AddDly].
25. CBx.79.En_FailCheck
It is used to enable/disable confirm whether AR is successful by checking CB status.
Whether the reclosing is successful or not, it can be implemented by checking of CB status. If

[CBx.79.En_FailCheck] is set as "Enabled", the device will check CB status to confirm whether

Date: 2021-02-02
the reclosing is successful or not.
26. CBx.79.En_PDF_Blk
It is used to enable/disable auto-reclosing blocked when a fault occurs under pole discrepancy
condition.
Its recommended setting principle can refer to the setting [CBx.79.t_SecFault].
27. CBx.79.En_CutPulse
It is used to enable/disable adjust the length of reclosing pulse.
For the circuit breaker without anti-pump interlock, a setting [CBx.79.En_CutPulse] is available to
control the reclosing pulse. When this function is enabled, if the device operates to trip during
3
reclosing, the reclosing pulse will drop off immediately, so as to prevent multi-shot reclosing onto
fault.
28. CBx.79.En
It is used to enable/disable auto-reclosing.
29. CBx.79.Opt_Enable
It is used to enable/disable AR by external input signal besides logic setting [CBx.79.En].
Setting: only the setting, which means AR function is controlled only by setting [CBx.79.En].
Setting&Config: the setting and configuration signal, which means AR function is controlled not
only by setting [CBx.79.En], but also by external binary input which could be configured by
PCS-Studio.
If [CBx.79.Opt_Enable] is set as "Setting&Config", AR can be enabled if following conditions are

all satisfied:
⚫ Logic setting: [CBx.79.En] is set as "Enabled"
⚫ Binary input: "CBx.79.Enable" is energized
⚫ Binary input: "CBx.79.Block" is de-energized
If the setting [CBx.79.Opt_Enable] is set as "Setting", AR could be enabled only by setting

[CBx.79.En].
30. CBx.79.En_CBInit
It is used to enable/disable AR be initiated by CB open position.
This setting is available for selection if AR is initiated by CB status. Under normal conditions, when
AR is ready to reclosing, AR will be initiated if circuit breaker is open and corresponding phase
current is nil. AR initiated by CB status can be divided into initiating 1-pole AR and 3-pole AR. For
more details, please refer to "PCS-931S Technical Manual".

Date: 2021-02-02
31. CBx.79.Opt_Priority
It is used to select AR priority.
It is used for CB sequence reclosing in one and a half breakers.
None: single-breaker arrangement
High: master AR of double-breakers arrangement
Low: slave AR of double-breakers arrangement
The output signal "CBx.79.WaitToSlave" of master AR will be usually configured to the input signal
3 "CBx.79.WaitMaster" of slave AR. Slave AR is permissible to reclosing only if master AR is
reclosed successfully.
32. CBx.79.Opt_ValidMode
It is used to select the control source of AR mode.
AR mode can be selected by external signal via binary input signals or internal logic settings. If the
setting [CBx.79.Opt_ValidMode] set as "Setting", AR mode is determined by the settings. If the
settings [CBx.79.Opt_ValidMode] set as "Config", AR mode is determined by the binary input
signals.
Config: select AR mode by configuration signals
CBx.79.Sel_1PAR
CBx.79.Sel_3PAR
CBx.79.Sel_1P/3PAR
Setting: select AR mode by the settings
CBx.79.En_1PAR
CBx.79.En_3PAR
CBx.79.En_1P/3PAR
33. CBx.79.En_1P
It is used to enable/disable 1-pole AR mode.
It is valid only if the setting [CBx.79.Opt_ValidMode] set as "Setting".
Its recommended value is "Disabled".
34. CBx.79.En_3P
It is used to enable/disable 3-pole AR mode.
Its recommended value is "Disabled".

Date: 2021-02-02
35. CBx.79.En_1P/3P
It is used to enable/disable 1/3-pole AR mode.
Its recommended value is "Enabled".
3.33 Fault Location (FL)
3.33.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD 3
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsLine Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsLine Settings
3.33.2 Setting List

Table 3.33-1 Fault location settings
Name Range Step Unit Default

X1L (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω 10.000
R1L (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω 1.000
X0L (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω 20.000
R0L (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.010 Ω 3.000
X0M (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω 20.000
R0M (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω 3.000
LineLength 0.00~1000.00 0.01 km 100.00
1. X1L
It is used to set positive-sequence reactance of the whole line. (secondary value)
It is used for calculation of fault location, and it should be set the same as actual value.
2. R1L
It is used to set positive-sequence resistance of the whole line. (secondary value)
3. X0L
It is used to set zero-sequence reactance of the whole line. (secondary value)

Date: 2021-02-02
4. R0L
It is used to set zero-sequence resistance of the whole line. (secondary value)
5. X0M
It is used to set zero-sequence mutual reactance. (secondary value)
6. R0M
3 It is used to set zero-sequence mutual resistance of the whole line. (secondary value)
When an earth fault occurred on a line of parallel lines arrangement, for cases where precise fault
location is required for long lines with high mutual coupling, mutual compensation is then required
to improve the distance measurement. The residual current from the parallel line should be added
to the device, and the settings of mutual zero-sequence reactance, mutual zero-sequence
resistance should be set as the practical value. If the residual current from the parallel line isn’t
injected to the device, then the settings of mutual zero-sequence reactance, mutual
zero-sequence resistance should be set as 0.
7. LineLength
It is used to set total length of the whole line.

Date: 2021-02-02
4 Control Settings
4 Control Settings
Table of Contents
4.1 Synchronism Check (25) ................................................................................. 4-1

4.1.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.2 Voltage Selection ............................................................................................. 4-5

4.2.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 4-5
4
4.2.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 4-6
4.3 Switchgear Control .......................................................................................... 4-6

4.3.1 DPS settings ......................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.3.2 Control Settings .................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.3.3 Interlocking settings.............................................................................................................. 4-9
List of Tables
Table 4.1-1 Synchronism check settings .................................................................................. 4-1
Table 4.2-1 Voltage selection settings ....................................................................................... 4-6
Table 4.3-1 DPS settings ............................................................................................................. 4-7
Table 4.3-2 Control settings ....................................................................................................... 4-8
Table 4.3-3 Interlocking settings ................................................................................................ 4-9

Date: 2021-02-02
4 Control Settings

Date: 2021-02-02
-28
4 Control Settings
4.1 Synchronism Check (25)
4.1.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsMeas Control SettingsSyn Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Meas Control SettingsSyn Settings
4.1.2 Setting List

Table 4.1-1 Synchronism check settings
4
Setting
CBx.25.Opt_ValidMode
Config
Disabled
CBx.25.En_SynChk
Enabled
Disabled
CBx.25.En_DdChk
Enabled
CBx.25.U_UV 0.00~100.00 0.01 %
CBx.25.U_OV 100.00~170.00 0.01 %
CBx.25.f_UF 45.000~65.000 0.001 Hz
CBx.25.f_OF 45.000~65.000 0.001 Hz
Ua
Ub
Uc
CBx.25.Opt_U_SynChk
Uab
Ubc
Uca
CBx.25.U_Diff_Set 0.00~100.00 0.01 V
CBx.25.f_Diff_Set 0.00~2.00 0.01 Hz

Date: 2021-02-02
4 Control Settings
CBx.25.df/dt_Set 0.00~2.00 0.01 Hz/s
CBx.25.phi_Diff_Set 0.00~180.00 0.01 °
CBx.25.phi_Comp 0.00~360.00 0.01 °
SynDdRefDd
SynLvRefDd
SynDdRefLv
CBx.25.Opt_Mode_DdChk RefDd
SynDd
4 SynLvRefDd/SynDdRefLv
AnySideDd
CBx.25.U_DdChk 0.00~100.00 0.01 V
CBx.25.U_LvChk 0.00~100.00 0.01 V
CBx.25.t_Reset 0~60 1 s
CBx.25.t_Close_CB 0~2000 1 ms
Disabled
CBx.25.En_f_Diff_Chk
Enabled
Disabled
CBx.25.En_df/dt_Chk
Enabled
1. CBx.25.Opt_ValidMode
It is used to select the decision mode for synchronism check.
Setting: the mode of synchronism check is determined by the settings [CBx.25.En_SynChk] and
[CBx.25.En_DdChk];
Config: the mode of synchronism check is determined by the input signals "in_syn_chk" and
"in_vol_chk" via PCS-Studio configuration tool.
2. CBx.25.En_SynChk
It is used to enable/disable for synchro-check.
The setting is valid only if the setting [25.Opt_ValidMode] is set as "Setting".

Date: 2021-02-02
-28
4 Control Settings
3. CBx.25.En_DdChk
It is used to enable/disable dead charge check.
The setting is valid only if the setting [25.Opt_ValidMode] is set as "Setting".
4. CBx.25.U_UV
It is used to set under voltage threshold for CB closing blocking.
It should be set according to the pecentage of secondary rated phase voltage (Un) or secondary
rated phase-to-phase votlage (Unn) based on the value of the setting [CBx.25.Opt_U_SynChk].
[CBx.25.Opt_U_SynChk]="Ua", "Ub" or "Uc", taking Un as the reference value
[CBx.25.Opt_U_SynChk]="Uab", "Ubc" or "Uca", taking Unn as the reference value
When the voltage at reference side or synchronous side is less than the setting, the synchro-check
will be blocked. 4
Its recommended value is 80.00%Un.
5. CBx.25.U_OV
Percentage threshold of over voltage for CB closing blocking
It is used to set over voltage threshold for CB closing blocking.
It should be set according to the pecentage of secondary rated phase voltage (Un) or secondary
rated phase-to-phase votlage (Unn) based on the value of the setting [CBx.25.Opt_U_SynChk].
[CBx.25.Opt_U_SynChk]="Ua", "Ub" or "Uc", taking Un as the reference value
[CBx.25.Opt_U_SynChk]="Uab", "Ubc" or "Uca", taking Unn as the reference value
When the voltage at reference side or synchronous side is more than the setting, the
synchro-check will be blocked.
6. CBx.25.f_UF
It is used to set under frequency threshold for CB closing blocking.
It should be set according to the pecentage of rated frequency.
When the system frequency is less than the setting, the synchro-check will be blocked.
Its recommended value is 45.000Hz.
7. CBx.25.f_OF
It is used to set over frequency threshold for CB closing blocking.
It should be set according to the pecentage of rated frequency.
When the system frequency is more than the setting, the synchro-check will be blocked.

Date: 2021-02-02
4 Control Settings
8. CBx.25.Opt_U_SynChk
It is used to select voltage source for synchronism check.
Ua: phase-A voltage
Ub: phase-B voltage
Uc: phase-C voltage
Uab: phase-AB voltage
Ubc: phase-BC voltage
Uca: phase-CA voltage
The setting is valid only when the synchronization side or the reference side voltage is
4 three-phase. Please set it according to the actual synchronization voltage.
9. CBx.25.U_Diff_Set
It is used to set the threshold of voltage difference for synchronism check.
Its recommended value is 10.00V.
10. CBx.25.f_Diff_Set
It is used to set the threshold of frequency difference for synchronism check.
11. CBx.25.df/dt_Set
It is used to set the threshold of rate-of-change of frequency difference for synchronism check.
Its recommended value is 1.00Hz/s.
12. CBx.25.phi_Diff_Set
It is used to set the threshold of phase difference for synchronism check.
Its recommended value is 15.00°.
13. CBx.25.phi_Comp
It is used to set compensation angle of phase difference for synchronism check.
14. CBx.25.Opt_Mode_DdChk
It is used to select of dead charge check mode.
SynDdRefDd: synchronism voltage is dead & reference voltage is dead
SynLvRefDd: synchronism voltage is live & reference voltage is dead
SynDdRefLv: synchronism voltage is dead & reference voltage is live

Date: 2021-02-02
-28
4 Control Settings
RefDd: reference voltage is dead
SynDd: synchronism voltage is dead
SynLvRefDd/SynDdRefLv: synchronism voltage is live & reference voltage is dead or synchronism

voltage is dead & reference voltage is live
AnySideDd: synchronism voltage or reference voltage is dead
15. CBx.25.U_DdChk
It is used to set the threshold for voltage dead check.
Its recommended value is 17.32V.
16. CBx.25.U_LvChk
It is used to set the threshold for voltage live check.
Its recommended value is 34.64V. 4

17. CBx.25.t_Reset
It is used to set the threshold of duration for synchrocheck.
The window starts from the receiving moment of synchronous closing command and ends when
all synchronous closing criteria are met or timeout. The timeout causes the synchronism check
failure.
18. CBx.25.t_Close_CB
It is used to set circuit breaker closing time. It is the time from receiving closing command pulse till
the CB is completely closed. Please set it according to the mechanism operating time of the circuit
breaker.
Its recommended value is 20 ms.
19. 25.En_f_Diff_Chk
It is used to enable/disable frequency difference check.
20. 25.En_df/dt_Chk
It is used to enable/disable frequency variation difference check.
4.2 Voltage Selection
4.2.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsSystem Settings

Date: 2021-02-02
4 Control Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalGlobal SettingsSystem Settings
4.2.2 Setting List

Table 4.2-1 Voltage selection settings
NoVoltSel
DblBusOneCB
CBx.VoltSel.Opt_CBConfig
3/2BusCB
3/2TieCB
4 4.2.3 Calculation Principle

1. CBx.VoltSel.Opt_CBConfig
Selection of CB application scenario for voltage selection
It is used to select the circuit breaker No.x arrangement for voltage selection.
NoVoltSel: no voltage selection
DblBusOneCB: one circuit breaker for double busbar
3/2BusCB: bus side circuit breaker for one and a half breakers
3/2TieCB: line side circuit breaker for one and a half breakers
Please set it according to the actual the circuit breaker arrangement, and it should be set as
"NoVoltSel" if no voltage selection is adopted and the voltage selection logic is disabled.
4.3 Switchgear Control
4.3.1 DPS settings
4.3.1.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsMeas Control SettingsDPS Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalMeas Control SettingsDPS Settings

Date: 2021-02-02
-28
4 Control Settings
Table 4.3-1 DPS settings
CB**.DPS.t_DPU 0~60000 1 ms
Disabled
CB**.DPS.En_Alm
Enabled
CB**.DPS.t_Alm 0~60000 1 ms
DS**.DPS.t_DPU 0~60000 1 ms
Disabled
DS**.DPS.En_Alm
Enabled
4
DS**.DPS.t_Alm 0~60000 1 ms
2. CB**.DPS.t_DPU
It is used to set the DPU (delay pick up) time of DPS (double point status), i.e. debounce time. (for
circuit breaker No.**)
The setting value should be greater than the CB operating time to avoid the intermediate state in
the process of CB opening or closing.
3. CB**.DPS.En_Alm
It is used to enable/disable DPS alarm. (for circuit breaker No.**)
4. CB**.DPS.t_Alm
It is used to set time delay of DPS alarm. (for circuit breaker No.**)
5. DS**.DPS.t_DPU
It is used to set the DPU (delay pick up) time of DPS, i.e. debounce time. (for circuit breaker No.**)
The setting value should be greater than the DS operating time to avoid the intermediate state in
the process of DS opening or closing.
6. DS**.DPS.En_Alm
It is used to enable/disable DPS alarm. (for circuit breaker No.**)

Date: 2021-02-02
4 Control Settings
7. DS**.DPS.t_Alm
It is used to set time delay of DPS alarm. (for circuit breaker No.**)
4.3.2 Control Settings
4.3.2.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsMeas Control SettingsControl Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalMeas Control SettingsControl Settings

4
Table 4.3-2 Control settings
CB**.t_PW_Opn 0~60000 1 ms
CB**.t_PW_Cls 0~60000 1 ms
DS**.t_PW_Opn 0~60000 1 ms
DS**.t_PW_Cls 0~60000 1 ms
DirCtrl**.t_PW_Opn 0~60000 1 ms
DirCtrl**.t_PW_Cls 0~60000 1 ms
1. CB**.t_PW_Opn
It is used to set pulse width (PW), i.e. holding time, for opening output of circuit breaker No.**.
The setting value should be long enough to start the relay in the CB opening circuit.
2. CB**.t_PW_Cls
It is used to set pulse width (PW), i.e. holding time, for closing output of circuit breaker No.**.
The setting value should be long enough to start the relay in the CB closing circuit.
3. DS**.t_PW_Opn
It is used to set pulse width (PW), i.e. holding time, for opening output of disconnector switch

Date: 2021-02-02
-28
4 Control Settings
No.**.
The setting value should be long enough to start the relay in the DS opening circuit.
4. DS**.t_PW_Cls
It is used to set pulse width (PW), i.e. holding time, for closing output of disconnector switch No.**.
The setting value should be long enough to start the relay in the DS closing circuit.
5. DirCtrl**.t_PW_Opn
It is used to set pulse width (PW), i.e. holding time, for opening output of direct control object No.**.
The setting value should be long enough to start the relay in the direct control opening circuit.
4
6. DirCtrl**.t_PW_Cls
It is used to set pulse width (PW), i.e. holding time, for closing output of direct control object No.**.
The setting value should be long enough to start the relay in the direct control closing circuit.
4.3.3 Interlocking settings
4.3.3.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsMeas Control SettingsInterlocking Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalMeas Control SettingsInterlocking

Settings
Table 4.3-3 Interlocking settings
Disabled
CB**.En_CILO_Opn
Enabled
Disabled
CB**.En_CILO_Cls
Enabled
Disabled
DS**.En_CILO_Opn
Enabled

Date: 2021-02-02
4 Control Settings
Disabled
DS**.En_CILO_Cls
Enabled
Disabled
DirCtrl**.En_CILO_Opn
Enabled
Disabled
DirCtrl**.En_CILO_Cls
Enabled
1. CB**.En_CILO_Opn
It is used to enable/disable open output of circuit breaker No.** controlled by the interlocking logic.
2. CB**.En_CILO_Cls
4 It is used to enable/disable closing output of circuit breaker No.** controlled by the interlocking
logic.
3. DS**.En_CILO_Opn
It is used to enable/disable open output of disconnector switch No.** controlled by the interlocking
logic.
4. DS**.En_CILO_Cls
It is used to enable/disable closing output of disconnector switch No.** controlled by the

interlocking logic.
5. DirCtrl**.En_CILO_Opn
It is used to enable/disable open output of direct control object No.** controlled by the interlocking
logic.
6. DirCtrl**.En_CILO_Cls
It is used to enable/disable closing output of direct control object No.** controlled by the
interlocking logic.

Date: 2021-02-02
-28
Table of Contents
5.1 Function ........................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.2 Energy Metering Settings ............................................................................... 5-6

5.2.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.2.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 5-6
List of Tables
5
Table 5.1-1 Function settings (single circuit breaker) ............................................................. 5-1
Table 5.1-2 Function settings (double circuit breaker) ........................................................... 5-2
Table 5.2-1 Energy metering settings........................................................................................ 5-6

Date: 2021-02-02

Date: 2021-02-02
5.1 Function
5.1.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsMeas Control SettingsFunction Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalMeas Control SettingsFunction Settings
5.1.2 Setting List

Table 5.1-1 Function settings (single circuit breaker)
Disabled
Prot.En_Alm_ROV
Enabled
Prot.3U0_Alm_ROV 0.0~100.0 0.1 %Un

5
Disabled
Prot.En_Alm_UV
Enabled
Prot.U_Alm_UV 0.0~100.0 0.1 %Un
Prot.ZeroDrift_U 0.00~1.00 0.01 %
Disabled
Prot.En_Alm_ROC
Enabled
Prot.3I0_Alm_ROC 0.0~100.0 0.1 %In
Prot.Opt_CT_Measmt Ia-Ib-Ic, Ia-Ic
Prot.ZeroDrift_I 0.00~1.00 0.01 %
Prot.ZeroDrift_PQ 0.00~1.00 0.01 %
3I0Adj.ZeroDrift_I 0.00~1.00 0.01 %
UB1.USyn.ZeroDrift_U 0.00~1.00 0.01 %
UL2.USyn.ZeroDrift_U 0.00~1.00 0.01 %

Date: 2021-02-02
Table 5.1-2 Function settings (double circuit breaker)
Disabled
Prot.En_Alm_ROV
Enabled
Prot.3U0_Alm_ROV 0.0~100.0 0.1 %Un
Disabled
Prot.En_Alm_UV
Enabled
Prot.U_Alm_UV 0.0~100.0 0.1 %Un
Prot.ZeroDrift_U 0.00~1.00 0.01 %
Disabled
Prot.En_Alm_ROC
Enabled
Disabled
5 Prot.CB1.En_Alm_ROC
Enabled
Disabled
Prot.CB2.En_Alm_ROC
Enabled
Prot.3I0_Alm_ROC 0.0~100.0 0.1 %In
Prot.CB1.3I0_Alm_ROC 0.0~100.0 0.1 %In
Prot.CB2.3I0_Alm_ROC 0.0~100.0 0.1 %In
Ia-Ib-Ic
Prot.Opt_CT_Measmt
Ia-Ic
Ia-Ib-Ic
Prot.CB1.Opt_CT_Measmt
Ia-Ic
Ia-Ib-Ic
Prot.CB2.Opt_CT_Measmt
Ia-Ic
Prot.ZeroDrift_I 0.00~1.00 0.01 %
Prot.CB1.ZeroDrift_I 0.00~1.00 0.01 %
Prot.CB2.ZeroDrift_I 0.00~1.00 0.01 %
Prot.ZeroDrift_PQ 0.00~1.00 0.01 %
Prot.CB1.ZeroDrift_PQ 0.00~1.00 0.01 %

Date: 2021-02-02
Prot.CB2.ZeroDrift_PQ 0.00~1.00 0.01 %
3I0Adj.ZeroDrift_I 0.00~1.00 0.01 %
UL2.USyn.ZeroDrift_U 0.00~1.00 0.01 %
1. Prot.En_Alm_ROV
It is used to enable/disable residual overvoltage supervision.
2. Prot.3U0_Alm_ROV
It is used to set the threshold of residual overvoltage supervision, which is indicated by the
percentage of the rated value.
Its recommended value is 10.0%Un. 5

3. Prot.En_Alm_UV
It is used to enable/disable phase undervoltage supervision.
4. Prot.U_Alm_UV
It is used to set the threshold of phase undervoltage supervision, which is indicated by the
percentage of the rated value.
5. Prot.ZeroDrift_U
It is used to set the threshold to limit the zero-drift influence of the protection voltage due to the
temperature or other environmental factors. The measured value less than this setting will be
regarded as a zero drift and ignored.
6. Prot.En_Alm_ROC
It is used to enable/disable residual overcurrent supervision. (single CB application)
7. Prot.CB1.En_Alm_ROC
It is used to enable/disable residual overcurrent supervision of circuit breaker No.1. (double CBs
application)
8. Prot.CB2.En_Alm_ROC
It is used to enable/disable residual overcurrent supervision of circuit breaker No.2. (double CBs
application)

Date: 2021-02-02
9. Prot.3I0_Alm_ROC
It is used to set the threshold of residual overcurrent supervision, which is indicated by the
percentage of the rated value. (single CB application)
Its recommended value is 10.0%In.
10. Prot.CB1.3I0_Alm_ROC
It is used to set the threshold of residual overcurrent supervision for circuit breaker No.1, which is
indicated by the percentage of the rated value. (double CBs application)
11. Prot.CB2.3I0_Alm_ROC
It is used to set the threshold of residual overcurrent supervision for circuit breaker No.2, which is
indicated by the percentage of the rated value. (double CBs application)
12. Prot.Opt_CT_Measmt
5 It is used to select CT wiring mode which used by current measurement. (single CB application)
Ia-Ib-Ic: three-phase mode
Ia-Ic: Ib is calculated according to Ia and Ic, → = −(→ + →).

𝐼𝑏 𝐼𝑎 𝐼𝑐
13. Prot.CB1.Opt_CT_Measmt
It is used to select CT wiring mode for circuit breaker No.1 which used by current measurement.
(double CBs application)

14. Prot.CB2.Opt_CT_Measmt
It is used to select CT wiring mode for circuit breaker No.2 which used by current measurement.
(double CBs application)

15. Prot.ZeroDrift_I
It is used to set the threshold to limit the zero-drift influence of the current due to the temperature
or other environmental factors. A measured value less than this setting will be regarded as a zero

Date: 2021-02-02
drift and ignored. (single CB application)
Its recommended value is 0.20%.
16. Prot.CB1.ZeroDrift_I
drift and ignored. (double CBs application)
17. Prot.CB2.ZeroDrift_I
18. Prot.ZeroDrift_PQ
It is used to set the threshold to limit the zero-drift influence of the power due to the temperature or
other environmental factors. A measured value less than this setting will be regarded as a zero
5
drift and ignored. (single CB application)
19. Prot.CB1.ZeroDrift_PQ
20. Prot.CB2.ZeroDrift_PQ
21. 3I0Adj.ZeroDrift_I
It is used to set the threshold to limit the zero-drift influence of the residual current from parallel line
due to the temperature or other environmental factors. A measured value less than this setting will
be regarded as a zero drift and ignored.
22. UB1.USyn.ZeroDrift_U
It is used to set the threshold to limit the zero-drift influence of the synchronism voltage (UB1) due

Date: 2021-02-02
to the temperature or other environmental factors. A measured value less than this setting will be
23. UL2.USyn.ZeroDrift_U
It is used to set the threshold to limit the zero-drift influence of the synchronism voltage (UL2) due
24. UB2.USyn.ZeroDrift_U
It is used to set the threshold to limit the zero-drift influence of the synchronism voltage (UB2) due
5 5.2 Energy Metering Settings
5.2.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsMeas Control SettingsEnergy Metering Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalMeas Control SettingsEnergy Metering

Settings
5.2.2 Setting List

Table 5.2-1 Energy metering settings
MMTR.U2n 0.00~200.00 0.01 V
MMTR.I2n 1~5 1 A
1. MMTR.U2n
It is used to set rated secondary voltage for metering.
2. MMTR.I2n
It is used to set rated secondary current for metering.

Date: 2021-02-02
Table of Contents
6.1 PMU Global Settings ....................................................................................... 6-1

6.1.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.2 PMU Communication Settings........................................................................ 6-3

6.2.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 6-3
6.3 PMU Bay Settings ............................................................................................ 6-5

6.3.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.3.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 6-5

6
6.4 PMU BI Settings ............................................................................................. 6-10
6.4.1 Access Path ........................................................................................................................ 6-10
6.4.2 Setting List .......................................................................................................................... 6-10
6.5 PMU Label Settings ........................................................................................6-11

6.5.1 Access Path ........................................................................................................................ 6-11
6.5.2 Setting List .......................................................................................................................... 6-11
List of Tables
Table 6.1-1 PMU global settings................................................................................................. 6-1
Table 6.2-1 PMU communication settings ................................................................................ 6-3
Table 6.3-1 PMU bay settings ..................................................................................................... 6-5
Table 6.4-1 PMU BI settings...................................................................................................... 6-10

Date: 2021-02-02
Table 6.5-1 PMU label settings ................................................................................................. 6-11

Date: 2021-02-02
6.1 PMU Global Settings
6.1.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsPMU SettingsPMU Global Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalPMU SettingsPMU Global Settings
6.1.2 Setting List

Table 6.1-1 PMU global settings
Disabled
En_PMU
Enabled
P_Class
Opt_Class_PMU
M_Class
DataRate 10~120 1 fps

6
Substation_PMU Max. 16 characters
N_Chgd_CFG 0~65535 1
Port_TCP 0~65535 1
Port_UDP 1024~65535 1
1. En_PMU
It is used to enable/disable the synchrophasor measurement function.
2. Opt_Class_PMU
It is used to select the calculation method of synchrophasor data.
P class: faster response speed
This algorithm adopts a short time window, so its response speed is fast. It is suitable for fast
protection and control applications, but the ability of suppressing the out-of-band signals is poor.
If the response speed is required, please set it as "P_Class"
M class: higher measurement precision

Date: 2021-02-02
This algorithm adopts a long time window, so its accuracy is high for measuring steady and
dynamic signal, and can suppress the out-of-brand signals. However, its response speed is slower
than that when adopting P_Class.
If the measurement accuracy is required, please set it as "M_Class".
Please set the setting according to the actual requirements.
3. DataRate
It is used to set data transmission rate of PMU reporting synchrophasor data to the parent IEDs
(such as, PDC or PMU master station).
The rate is generally equal to or less than the rated frequency of power system.
For the 50Hz system, the selectable rates are 100, 50, 25, 10 frames per second.
For the 60Hz system, the selectable rates are 120, 60, 30, 20, 15, 12, 10 frames per second.
4. Substation_PMU
It is used to set name of substation which is equipped with PMU.
The name will be used in the CFG-1 and CFG-2 frame.
5. N_Chgd_CFG
It is used to indicate the version of CFG of PMU, and inform the client when the CFG-1 has
6 changed.
The starting value of the setting is 0, and it should increase by 1 every time CFG-1 is adjusted. For
example, changing the branch name or rating will cause the change of CFG-1, so the setting
should be modified.
6. Port_TCP
It is used to set TCP port for PMU based on IEEE C37.118 standard.
There are three kinds of communication modes available for PMU, TCP, UDP and TCP-UDP mode.
When adopting the TCP or TCP-UDP mode, the TCP port will be used. The port values of all TCP
clients should be consistent with the setting value.
The default port of TCP is 4712, and it is invalid when the setting [PDC**.Opt_Protocol] is set as
"UDP")
The port setting must be configured on the PDC correspondingly.
7. Port_UDP
It is used to set UDP port for PMU based on IEEE C37.118 standard.
There are three kinds of communication modes available for PMU, TCP, UDP and TCP-UDP mode.
When adopting the UDP or TCP-UDP mode, the UDP port will be used. The port values of all UDP
receivers should be consistent with the setting value.

Date: 2021-02-02
The default port of TCP is 4713, and it is invalid when the setting [PDC**.Opt_Protocol] is set as
"TCP")
The port setting must be configured on the PDC correspondingly.
6.2 PMU Communication Settings
6.2.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsPMU SettingsPMU Communication Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalPMU SettingsPMU Communication

Settings
6.2.2 Setting List

Table 6.2-1 PMU communication settings
PDC**.IP_TCP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
PDC**.IP_UDP_Dest 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 6
PDC**.IP_MulticastSrc 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
None
TCP
PDC**.Opt_Protocol
UDP
TCP-UDP
Unicast
PDC**.Opt_UDP Broadcast
Multicast
PDC**.IDCODE 1~65534
PDC**.IDCODE 1~65534
xx is determined by the setting [Name_PMUBay] in the submenu PMUBay

Settings.

Date: 2021-02-02

1. PDC**.Name
It is used to set the name of PDC (Phasor Data Concentrators) connecting with PMU.
The name length should not exceed 20 characters.
2. PDC**.IP_TCP
It is used to set destination IP address of connected PDC** using TCP communication protocol.
This setting is valid when the setting [PDC**.Opt_Protocol] is set as "TCP" or "TCP-UDP". The
communication of PMU is based on whitelisting, only when the IP address of the TCP client has
been set in the PMU, the client has the right to communicate with PMU using TCP communication
protocol.
If the PDC does not exist or the TCP or TCP-UDP mode is not adopted, the IP address can be set
as "0.0.0.0".
Please set the setting according to the actual requirment.
3. PDC**.IP_UDP_Dest
It is used to set destination IP address of connected PDC** using UDP communication protocol.
This setting is valid when the setting [PDC**.Opt_Protocol] is set as "UDP" or "TCP-UDP". The
6 PMU transmits the UDP message to this address. It may be unicast address, broadcast address
or multicast address. It is noted that the IP address should match with the setting
[PDC**.Opt_UDP].
Please set the setting according to the actual requirment.
4. PDC**.IP_MulticastSrc
It is used to set the multicast source IP address of PDC** using UDP communication protocol, it is
consistent with some network interface IP address of the device. This network interface uses this
IP address to transmit UDP message to multicast group. Since the IP addresss of the muticast
group and any network interface of the device have the different network segments, this setting
essentially informs the PMU which network interface to send UDP multicast message.
The setting is valid when the setting [PDC**.Opt_Protocol] is set as "UDP" or "TCP-UDP", and the
setting [PDC**.Opt_UDP] is set as "Multicast".
It should be set as IP address of the Ethernet port which is chosen to tranmitting UDP multicast
message.
5. PDC**.Opt_Protocol
It is used to select the communication protocol of PDC**.
None: no communication between PDC and PMU.
TCP: in TCP communication mode, configuration frames (CFG-1/2), command frames (CMD), and

Date: 2021-02-02
DATA frames (DATA) defined in the IEEE C37.118 standard are transmitted via TCP connections.
When using TCP mode, the settings [Port_TCP] and [PDC**.IP_TCP] need to be set.
UDP: in UDP communication mode, configuration frames (CFG-1/2), command frames (CMD),
and DATA frames (DATA) defined in the IEEE C37.118 standard are transmitted via UDP
messages.
TCP-UDP: in TCP-UDP communication mode, configuration frames (CFG-1/2) and command

frames (CMD) defined in the IEEE C37.118 standard are transmitted via TCP connections, and
DATA frames (DATA) are transmitted via UDP messages.
It shall be consistent with the communication protocol of the PDC at the opposite end. Its
recommended value is "TCP".
Please set the setting according to the actual requirement.
6. PDC**.Opt_UDP
It is used to select the transmission type using UDP communication protocol
The setting is valid when the setting [PDC**.Opt_Protocol] is set as "UDP" or "TCP-UDP". For the
communication between the PMU and the third-party PDCs, the setting is recommended to be set
as "Multicast".
7. PDC**.IDCODE
6
It is used to set ID code of the PDC**.
The setting can identify each PDC for the protocol. Please set the setting according to the site
IDCODE planning, and it should be consistent with the IDCODE of the PDC at the opposite end.
6.3 PMU Bay Settings
6.3.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsPMU SettingsPMU Bay Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalPMU SettingsPMU Bay Settings
6.3.2 Setting List

Table 6.3-1 PMU bay settings
Name_PMUBay Max. 12 characters

Date: 2021-02-02
xx.U1n 0.001~1000.000 0.001 kV
xx.I1n 0.1~20000.0 0.1 A
None
Bay
xx.Opt_UnitType 1
Bus(U_3P)
Bus(U_1P)
U1
Ua
xx.Opt_U_MeasFreq 1
Ub
Uc
Disabled
xx.En_TrigDFR
Enabled
xx.Up_UpLmt 0.010~2.000 0.001 Un
xx.U1_UpLmt 0.010~2.000 0.001 Un

6
xx.U2_UpLmt 0.010~2.000 0.001 Un
xx.U0_UpLmt 0.010~2.000 0.001 Un
xx.Up_LowLmt 0.010~2.000 0.001 Un
xx.U1_LowLmt 0.010~2.000 0.001 Un
xx.Ip_UpLmt 0.010~2.000 0.001 In
xx.I1_UpLmt 0.010~2.000 0.001 In
xx.I2_UpLmt 0.010~2.000 0.001 In
xx.I0_UpLmt 0.010~2.000 0.001 In
xx.f_Diff_Lmt 0.01~10.00 0.01 Hz
xx.df/dt_Lmt 0.01~50.00 0.01 Hz/s
xx is determined by the setting [Name_PMUBay] in the submenu PMUBay

Settings.

Date: 2021-02-02

1. Name_PMUBay
It is used to set the name of PMU bay.
This setting together with the [Name_**] (in submenu "PMU Label Settings") form a complete
measurement name, and the total length is no more than 16 characters.
The name of PMU bay is generally composed of station code and bay name, with a total length of
no more than 12 characters, and it is recommended to set the name according to 12 characters.
2. xx.U1n
It is used to set VT primary rated voltage for PMU bay.
3. xx.I1n
It is used to set CT primary rated current for PMU bay.
4. xx.Opt_UnitType
It is used to set the application scenario of AC bay.
The different option corresponds to the different type of measurement quantities.
None: the measuring function is disabled.
Bay: measuring three-phase voltage and three-phase current.

6
Bus(U_3P): measuring three-phases voltage, the current and power quantities are not measured
and displayed.
Bus(U_1P): measuring single-phase voltage, the current and power quantities are not measured
and displayed. Besides, zero-sequence and negative-sequence voltage are not calculated, their
values are fixed as "0".
When the setting is set as "Bus(U_1P)", it is recommended to use the phase-A voltage.
Please set the setting according to the actual AC bay application.
5. xx.Opt_U_MeasFreq
It is used to select base voltage for frequency measurement.
U1: positive-sequence voltage
Ua: phase-A voltage
Ub: phase-B voltage
Uc: phase-C voltage
Its recommended value is "U1", because the frequency measurement function will not be affected
in case of single-phase or two-phase VT failure.

Date: 2021-02-02
6. xx.En_TrigDFR
It is used to enable/disable trigger disturbance fault recording function in case any following over
limit situation
If the setting is set as "Enabled", the triggering flag will be mapped in "STAT" field of PMU data
frame with a time delay of four power-frequency cycles when the triggering condition is satisfied.
For an independent PMU device, the recording will be performed in the above-mentioned case,
but for the device integrating with the PMU function, the above-mentioned case will not affect the
recording function, the device starts the recording function according to its own criterion.
Its recommended value "Eenabled"
7. xx.Up_UpLmt
It is used to set the upper limit of phase voltage.
For some special AC bay, such as the load with frequent fluctuation, the threshold value can be
increased appropriately.
8. xx.U1_UpLmt
It is used to set the upper limit of positive sequence voltage.

6 For some special AC bay, such as the load with frequent fluctuation, the threshold value can be
9. xx.U2_UpLmt
It is used to set the upper limit of negative-sequence voltage.
10. xx.U0_UpLmt
It is used to set the upper limit of zero sequence voltage.
11. xx.Up_LowLmt
It is used to set the lower limit of phase voltage.

Date: 2021-02-02
12. xx.U1_LowLmt
It is used to set the lower limit of positive sequence voltage
13. xx.Ip_UpLmt
It is used to set the upper limit of phase current
14. xx.I1_UpLmt
It is used to set the upper limit of positive sequence current.

6
15. xx.I2_UpLmt
It is used to set the upper limit of negative sequence current.
16. xx.I0_UpLmt
It is used to set the upper limit of zero sequence current.
17. xx.f_Diff_Lmt
It is used to set the limit of frequency deviation.

Date: 2021-02-02
18. xx.df/dt_Lmt
It is used to set the limit of rate-of-change of frequency.
6.4 PMU BI Settings
6.4.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsPMU SettingsPMU BI Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalPMU SettingsPMU BI Settings
6.4.2 Setting List

Table 6.4-1 PMU BI settings

6 Name_BI_** Max. 16 characters
Disabled
Link_BI_TrigDFR
Enabled
Disabled
BI_**.En_TrigDFR
Enabled
1. Name_BI_**
It is used to set the name of binary input** for PMU.
The setting generally composed of station name and binary input name. Its total length should not
exceed 16 characters.
Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.
2. Link_BI_TrigDFR
It is used to enable/disable disturbance fault recording function in case status changing of any
binary signal for PMU.
If the setting is set as "Enabled", the status of the binary input is changed and its corresponding

Date: 2021-02-02
setting [BI_**.En_TrigDFR] is set as "Enabled", the triggering flag will be mapped in "STAT" field of
PMU data frame. For an independent PMU device, the recording will be performed in the
above-mentioned case, but for the device integrating with the PMU function, the above-mentioned
case will not affect the recording function, the device starts the recording function according to its
own criterion.
3. BI_**.En_TrigDFR
It is used to enable/disable disturbance fault recording function in case status changing of the
binary signal BI_** for PMU.
If the setting is set as "Enabled", the status of the binary input is changed and its corresponding
setting [BI_**.En_TrigDFR] is set as "Enabled", the triggering flag will be mapped in "STAT" field of
PMU data frame. For an independent PMU device, the recording will be performed in the
above-mentioned case, but for the device integrating with the PMU function, the above-mentioned
case will not affect the recording function, the device starts the recording function according to its
own criterion.
For a binary input which changes frequently, it is recommended to set as "Disabled".
6.5 PMU Label Settings

6
6.5.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsPMU SettingsPMU Label Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalPMU SettingsPMU Label Settings
6.5.2 Setting List

Table 6.5-1 PMU label settings
Name_Amp_Ua Max. 4 characters
Name_Amp_Ub Max. 4 characters
Name_Amp_Uc Max. 4 characters
Name_Amp_U0 Max. 4 characters

Date: 2021-02-02
Name_Amp_Ia Max. 4 characters
Name_Amp_Ib Max. 4 characters
Name_Amp_Ic Max. 4 characters
Name_Amp_I0 Max. 4 characters
Name_Ang_Ua Max. 4 characters
Name_Ang_Ub Max. 4 characters
Name_Ang_Uc Max. 4 characters
Name_Ang_U0 Max. 4 characters
6 Name_Ang_Ia Max. 4 characters
Name_Ang_Ib Max. 4 characters
Name_Ang_Ic Max. 4 characters
Name_Ang_I0 Max. 4 characters
Name_f Max. 4 characters
Name_df/dt Max. 4 characters
Name_P Max. 4 characters
Name_Q Max. 4 characters
1. Name_Amp_Ua
It is used to set the label for amplitude of phase-A voltage phasor.
The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".

Date: 2021-02-02
It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".
2. Name_Amp_Ub
It is used to set the label for amplitude of phase-B voltage phasor.
Bay Settings".
3. Name_Amp_Uc
It is used to set the label for amplitude of phase-C voltage phasor.
Bay Settings".
4. Name_Amp_U0
It is used to set the label for amplitude of zero-sequence voltage phasor.

6
Bay Settings".
5. Name_Amp_U1
It is used to set the label r amplitude of positive-sequence voltage phasor.
Bay Settings".
6. Name_Amp_U2
It is used to set the label for amplitude of negative-sequence voltage phasor.
Bay Settings".

Date: 2021-02-02
7. Name_Amp_Ia
It is used to set the label for amplitude of phase-A current phasor.
Bay Settings".
8. Name_Amp_Ib
It is used to set the label for amplitude of phase-B current phasor.
Bay Settings".
9. Name_Amp_Ic
It is used to set the label for amplitude of phase-C current phasor.
6 Bay Settings".
10. Name_Amp_I0
It is used to set the label for amplitude of zero-sequence current phasor.
Bay Settings".
11. Name_Amp_I1
It is used to set the label for amplitude of positive-sequence current phasor.
Bay Settings".

Date: 2021-02-02
12. Name_Amp_I2
It is used to set the label for amplitude of negative-sequence current phasor.
Bay Settings".
13. Name_Ang_Ua
It is used to set the label for angle of phase-A voltage phasor.
Bay Settings".
14. Name_Ang_Ub
It is used to set the label for angle of phase-B voltage phasor.
Bay Settings".
6
15. Name_Ang_Uc
It is used to set the label for angle of phase-C voltage phasor.
Bay Settings".
16. Name_Ang_U0
It is used to set the label for angle of zero-sequence voltage phasor.
Bay Settings".

Date: 2021-02-02
17. Name_Ang_U1
It is used to set the label for angle of positive-sequence voltage phasor.
Bay Settings".
18. Name_Ang_U2
It is used to set the label for angle of negative-sequence voltage phasor.
Bay Settings".
19. Name_Ang_Ia
It is used to set the label for angle of phase-A current phasor.
Bay Settings".
6 It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".
20. Name_Ang_Ib
It is used to set the label for angle of phase-B current phasor.
Bay Settings".
21. Name_Ang_Ic
It is used to set the label for angle of phase-C current phasor.
Bay Settings".

Date: 2021-02-02
22. Name_Ang_I0
It is used to set the label for angle of zero-sequence current phasor.
Bay Settings".
23. Name_Ang_I1
It is used to set the label for angle of positive-sequence current phasor.
Bay Settings".
24. Name_Ang_I2
It is used to set the label for angle of negative-sequence current phasor.
Bay Settings".
6
25. Name_f
It is used to set the label for bay frequency.
Bay Settings".
26. Name_df/dt
It is used to set the label for bay rate-of-change of frequency.
Bay Settings".

Date: 2021-02-02
27. Name_P
Label for bay active power.
Bay Settings".
28. Name_Q
It is used to set the label for bay reactive power.
Bay Settings".

Date: 2021-02-02
Table of Contents
7.1 Access Path ..................................................................................................... 7-1

7.2 Setting List ....................................................................................................... 7-1
7.3 Calculation Principle ....................................................................................... 7-1
List of Tables
Table 7.2-1 Travelling wave fault location settings .................................................................. 7-1

Date: 2021-02-02

Date: 2021-02-02
7.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsTWFL Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingTWFL Settings
7.2 Setting List
Table 7.2-1 Travelling wave fault location settings
TWFL.t_Diff_InterSubst_Set 0~20 1 ms
xx.TWFL.Rmt.Substation
xx.TWFL.Velocity_Set 100.00~300.00 0.01 m/us
7.3 Calculation Principle
1. TWFL.t_Diff_InterSubst_Set
It is used to set the time deviation setting between local substation and remote substation.
It can simply monitor the deviation of clock synchronization between the devices on both sides. 7
When the deviation exceeds the setting, the travelling-wave fault location (TWFL) will be blocked.
When the optical-fiber channel is normal and the IRIG-B signal is connected to the devices on both
sides, the setting should be 2ms larger than the quantity "TWFL.t_Diff_InterSubst" which can be
checked in the path MainMenuStatusTWFL StatusTWFL ClockSyn Status.
2. TWFL.t_Diff_InterSubst_Set
It is used to set the name of remote substation.
Please set the setting according to the actual substation name in the remote end.
3. xx.TWFL.Velocity_Set
It is used to set the velocity of the travelling wave.
Please set the setting according to the actual TW velocity.
It recommends measuring the actual TW velocity when commissioning the device. With the circuit
breakers open at both sides, close the local circuit breaker to energize the line. Check the local
TW recording, find the first moment (t1) when the current obviously changes, and find the second

Date: 2021-02-02
L
moment (t2) when the current obviously changes near the time t1 + 2 ×
C
Where:
L is the length of the line, unit: m
C is the estimated TW velocity, 294m/us for the overhead line, 150m/us for the cable
𝐿
[𝑥𝑥. 𝑇𝑊𝐹𝐿. 𝑉𝑒𝑙𝑜𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 2 ×
𝑡2 − 𝑡1

Date: 2021-02-02
Table of Contents
8.1 VT Circuit Supervision (VTS) .......................................................................... 8-1

8.1.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 8-1
8.2 CT Circuit Supervision (CTS).......................................................................... 8-2

8.2.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 8-2
List of Tables
Table 8.1-1Supervision settings (VT) ........................................................................................ 8-1
Table 8.2-1Supervision settings (CT) ........................................................................................ 8-2

Date: 2021-02-02

Date: 2021-02-02
8.1 VT Circuit Supervision (VTS)
8.1.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsSuperv Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalGlobal SettingsSuperv Settings
8.1.2 Setting List

Table 8.1-1Supervision settings (VT)
Name Range Step Unit Default

VTS.En Disabled, Enabled Enabled
VTS.Opt_VT Bus, Bay Bus
VTS.t_DPU 0.200~30.000 0.001 s 1.250
VTS.t_DDO 0.200~30.000 0.001 s 10.000
VTS.U1_Set 0.00~100.00 0.01 V 30.00
VTS.3U0_Set 0.00~100.00 0.01 V 8.00
VTS.U2_Set 0.00~100.00 0.01 V 8.00
1. VTS.En
It is used to enable/disable VT circuit supervision.
2. VTS.Opt_VT
It is used to select voltage source for protection calculation, busbar VT or line VT.
Bus: busbar VT 8
Bay: bay VT
3. VTS.t_DPU
It is used to set pickup time delay of VT circuit supervision.
4. VTS.t_DDO
It is used to set dropoff time delay of VT circuit supervision.
5. VTS.U1_Set
It is used to set positive-sequence voltage setting of VT circuit supervision.

Date: 2021-02-02
6. VTS.3U0_Set
It is used to set zero-sequence voltage setting of VT circuit supervision.
7. VTS.U2_Set
It is used to set negative-sequence voltage setting of VT circuit supervision.
8.2 CT Circuit Supervision (CTS)
8.2.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsSuperv Settings
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalGlobal SettingsSuperv Settings
8.2.2 Setting List

Table 8.2-1Supervision settings (CT)
CBx.CTS.3I0_Set 0.00~200.00 0.01 A
CBx.CTS.3U0_Set 0.00~200.00 0.01 V
CBx.CTS.t_DPU 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

8
CBx.CTS.t_DDO 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
CBx.CTS.En
Enabled
1. CBx.CTS.3I0_Set
It is used to set zero-sequence current setting of CT circuit supervision.
It should be greater than the maximum unbalanced current and less than load current, at the same
time, it should be sensitive enough.

Date: 2021-02-02
2. CBx.CTS.3U0_Set
It is used to set zero-sequence voltage setting of CT circuit supervision.
It should be greater than the maximum unbalanced voltage, and it should be sensitive enough.
3. CBx.CTS.t_DPU
It is used to set pickup time delay of CT circuit supervision.
4. CBx.CTS.t_DDO
It is used to set dropoff time delay of CT circuit supervision.
5. CBx.CTS.En
It is used to set enable/disable CT circuit supervision.

Date: 2021-02-02

Date: 2021-02-02
9 Logic Links
9 Logic Links
Table of Contents
9.1 Function Links ................................................................................................. 9-1

9.1.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 9-1
9.2 GOOSE Send Links ......................................................................................... 9-2

9.2.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.2.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 9-2
9.3 GOOSE Receive Links..................................................................................... 9-3

9.3.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.3.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 9-3
9.4 SV Receive Links ............................................................................................. 9-4

9.4.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 9-4
9.4.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 9-4
List of Tables
Table 9.1-1 Function links ........................................................................................................... 9-1
Table 9.2-1 GOOSE sending links .............................................................................................. 9-2

9
Table 9.3-1 GOOSE receiving links............................................................................................ 9-3
Table 9.4-1 SV receiving links .................................................................................................... 9-4

Date: 2021-02-02
9 Logic Links

Date: 2021-02-02
-07-13
9 Logic Links
9.1 Function Links

9.1.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalLogic LinksFunction Links
9.1.2 Setting List

Table 9.1-1 Function links
Disabled
Link_01
Enabled
Disabled
Link_02
Enabled
Disabled
Link_03
Enabled
Disabled
Link_04
Enabled
Disabled
Link_05
Enabled
Disabled
Link_06
Enabled
Disabled
Link_07
Enabled
9
Disabled
Link_08
Enabled
1. Link_xx
Function link setting xx. (xx from 01 to 08)
These function link settings can be used for logic programming via PCS-Studio configuration tool

Date: 2021-02-02
11-22
9 Logic Links
to convenient to enable or disable the function element, please refer to "Function Link in
Application Manual"
This logic link setting can also be configured by remote control command from local SCADA
system, master station in control center, etc.
9.2 GOOSE Send Links

9.2.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksGOOSE Send Links
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalLogic LinksGOOSE Send Links
9.2.2 Setting List

Table 9.2-1 GOOSE sending links
Disabled
**.GLink_Send
Enabled
1. Bxx.Name_**_GCommLink.GLink_Send
It is used to enable/disable corresponding GOOSE sending, ** is the user-defined description.
** can be defined by editing the "English Description" in the "Basic Information" page. Now
corresponding ** in the above table will change simultaneously. Please refer to "Logic Symbols in
Application Manual".
This link setting can also be configured by remote control command from local SCADA system,
9 master station in control center, etc.
If this logic link setting is configured as "Disabled", all the sent GOOSE data will be cleared to 0.
These settings will be invisible unless the following operations are

executed.
1. GOOSE communication in station level, "GOOSE (Slot 01)", or

Date: 2021-02-02
9 Logic Links
GOOSE communication in process level, "GOOSE (Slot 02)" is

enabled by PCS-Studio. Please refer to "System Config in Application
Manual".
2. Instantiate the logic symbol of logic link for GOOSE sending.

PCS-Studio provides configurable logic symbols of logic link for
sending (single input or multiple input). The corresponding setting item
(GOOSE sending link) can be automatically added to "GOOSE Send
Links" when each adding a logic symbol, and its name can be defined
by editing the "English Description". Please refer to "Logic Symbols
in Application Manual"
9.3 GOOSE Receive Links

9.3.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksGOOSE Recv Links
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalLogic LinksGOOSE Recv Links
9.3.2 Setting List

Table 9.3-1 GOOSE receiving links
Disabled
GLink_RecvSim
Enabled
Disabled
Bxx.Name_**_GCommLink.GLink_Recv
Enabled
1. GLink_RecvSim 9
It is used to enable/disable the allowance to accept simulated GOOSE messages.
Disabled: not receiving simulated message (simulation=0)
Enabled: receiving simulated message (simulation=1)
2. Bxx.Name_**_GCommLink.GLink_Recv
It is used to enable/disable GOOSE receiving link**

Date: 2021-02-02
11-22
9 Logic Links
"Bxx.Name_**_GCommLink" is the user-defined name of the GOOSE communication link of the

module located in slot No.xx, and it is determined by the label setting [Bxx.Name_**_GCommLink].
master station in control center, etc.
If this logic link setting is configured as "Disabled", the alarm signals "GAlm_ADisc",
"GAlm_BDisc", "GAlm_Maint_Unmatched" of this GOOSE communication link will NOT be
processed and issued.
These settings will be invisible unless GOOSE communication in station

level, "GOOSE (Slot 01)", or GOOSE communication in process level,
"GOOSE (Slot 02)" is enabled by PCS-Studio. Please refer to "System
Config in Application Manual".
PCS-Studio provides configurable logic symbols of logic link for GOOSE

receiving (single input or multiple input). The corresponding setting item
(GOOSE receiving link) can be automatically added to "GOOSE Recv
Links" when each adding a logic symbol, and its name can be defined by
editing the "English Description". Please refer to "Logic Symbols in
Application Manual"
9.4 SV Receive Links

9.4.1 Access Path
⚫ LCD
MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksSV Recv Links
⚫ PCS-Studio
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalLogic LinksSV Recv Links
9.4.2 Setting List

9
Table 9.4-1 SV receiving links
Disabled
SVLink_RecvSim
Enabled
Disabled
Bxx.Name_**_SVCommLink.SVLink_Recv
Enabled

Date: 2021-02-02
9 Logic Links

1. SVLink_RecvSim
It is used to enable/disable the allowance to accept simulated SV messages.
Disabled: not receiving simulated message (simulation=0)
Enabled: receiving simulated message (simulation=1)
2. Bxx.Name_**_SVCommLink.SVLink_Recv
It is used to enable/disable SV receiving link**.
"Bxx.Name_**_SVCommLink" is the user-defined name of the SV communication link of the

module located in slot No.xx, and it is determined by the label setting
[Bxx.Name_**_SVCommLink].
master station in control center, etc.
If this logic link setting is configured as "Disabled", the alarm signals "SVAlm_ADisc",
"SVAlm_BDisc", "SVAlm_Maint_Unmatched" of this SV communication link will NOT be
processed and issued.
These settings will be invisible unless "Sampling Mode" is chosen as "B:

Non-conventional instrument transformer" by PCS-Studio. Please refer to
"MOT Selection in Application Manual".

Date: 2021-02-02
11-22
9 Logic Links

Date: 2021-02-02
9 Logic Links
PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 1

Date: 2021-02-02
11-22

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Copyright © 2021 NR. All rights reserved.

About This Manual

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result

in death or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could

result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result

in minor or moderate injury or equipment damage.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay I

Important information about the device, product handling or a certain

section of the documentation which must be given particular attention.

Instructions and Warnings

Disconnect or de-energize all external connections BEFORE opening this

This device is shipped with default passwords. Default passwords should

DO NOT look into the fiber (laser) ports/connectors.

II PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

DO NOT look into the end of an optical cable connected to an optical

DO NOT perform any procedures or adjustments that this instruction

During installation, maintenance, or testing of the optical ports, ONLY use

Incorporated components, such as LEDs, transceivers, and laser emitters,

Equipment components are SENSITIVE to electrostatic discharge (ESD).

Insufficiently rated insulation can deteriorate under abnormal operating

SEVERE power and ground problems can occur on the communications

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay III

procedures and receive instruction to apply power. Equipment damage can

Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than

The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify

For example: the access path of protection settings is: MainMenu→Settings→Protection

⚫ Settings not in the table should be placed in brackets.

For example: the system setting [Opt_SysFreq]

⚫ Cross-references are presented in italics.

For example: press the button "ENT".

& & &

>=1 >=1 >=1

IV PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

⚫ Binary signal Input

Optional definite-time or inverse-time characteristics

Fixed delay pickup (10ms), fixed delay dropout (2ms)

Settable delay pickup, fixed delay dropout

Fixed delay pickup, settable delay dropout

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay V

Settable delay pickup, settable delay dropout

VI PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Phase Label Corresponding Relationship

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay VII

An overview of each manual section and section topics follows.

6 Synchrophasor Measurement Settings

7 Travelling-Wave Fault Location Settings

VIII PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Document Revision History

Current version: R1.00

R1.00 R1.41 2021-02-02 ⚫ Form the original manual

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay IX

X PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

1.1 Overview........................................................................................................... 1-1

Figure 1.1-3 Typical application of double circuit breakers ................................................... 1-2

Figure 1.2-1 Functional overview of PCS-931S ........................................................................ 1-3

Figure 1.3-1 Full view of PCS-931S settings .......................................................................... 1-11

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 1-a

1-b PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Figure 1.1-1 Typical application of single circuit breaker (single busbar)

Communication channel via direct dedicated fibre or MUX

Figure 1.1-2 Typical application of single circuit breaker (double busbars)

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 1-1